JP7146723B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing games.

For example, in Patent Document 1, when the pre-determination unit acquires the game data transmitted from the main control board, it determines whether the game data is data indicating a big hit, and the timing at which the pre-determination is performed Disclosed is a gaming machine in which the suggestive game performance currently in progress is suddenly stopped and freezes.

JP 2014-188261 A (paragraph 0111 to paragraph 0114)

As for the game machine disclosed in Patent Literature 1, which executes an effect based on the establishment of a starting condition, there is room for improving the interest of the effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aims to improve the entertainment of the performance executed based on the establishment of the starting condition.

(Means 1) The game machine according to the present invention is
The start condition is satisfied (the game ball has won the start winning opening), and then the start condition is satisfied (there is no control in either the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the number of pending memories is A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can perform variable display of special identification information (variable display of special symbols) based on the 0) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. ) and
Determining means (starting winning determination process (step S101) for determining that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening) is executed CPU 103) to
Production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production based on the determination by the determination means,
In response to the variable display of the special identification information, the variable display of the decoration identification information (the variable display of the decorative pattern) is executed, and the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is displayed for a specific period (the pattern stop period and the pattern fixed period). ) and decoration variable display means (production control CPU 120) that can be displayed over
with
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special effect (blackout effect at winning, flash effect at winning) within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from establishment of the start condition,
There are a plurality of types of special effects, and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect at the time of winning is higher than the flash effect at the time of winning),
When a special effect of a specific type is executed, the decoration identification information becomes invisible (as shown in FIGS. By displaying the blackout image [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative patterns [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. becomes difficult to see),
When a special effect of a predetermined type different from the specific type is executed, the decoration identification information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIGS. is executed, the blackout image [second layer] is not displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 The visibility of the [3rd layer] does not decrease and becomes visible),
The production executing means is
when the starting condition is satisfied outside the specific period, a specific type of special effect and a predetermined type of special effect can be executed in parallel,
When the starting condition is satisfied in the specific period, while restricting the execution of a specific type of special effect, it is possible to execute a predetermined type of special effect (as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7 , In the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, in the variable display corresponding to the starting winning effect that occurred during the specific period, the execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning is restricted, while the starting winning effect that occurred during the specific period is restricted. Flash effect can be executed at the time of winning even with variable display corresponding to
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, by not lowering the visibility of the decoration identification information during the specific period, misunderstanding of the display result can be prevented, and at the same time, an opportunity to execute the special effect can be ensured.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 078IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability for every setting value, the small-hit probability, and the time-saving deviation probability. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability for every setting value, the small-hit probability, and the time-saving deviation probability. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a time saving classification determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining time saving classification. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic part 078IW; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic part 078IW; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal; It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the characterizing part 078IW; It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 078IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the variable display of the fourth symbol and the display of the stop symbol. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect at the time of shifting to a time saving state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect at the time of shifting to a time saving state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect at the time of shifting to a time saving state. It is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of various productions. It is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of various productions. 9 is a timing chart for explaining execution timings of various effects in Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining execution timings of various effects in Modified Example 2. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing in the modification 4. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in modified example 5; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for losing (with time saving) / losing (without time saving), (B) is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for a small hit, ( C) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for big hits. (A) is a conceptual diagram schematically showing a layer structure, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the layer structure. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a blackout presentation at the time of winning; It is a flow chart showing an example of the effect determination process at the time of start winning of the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of the effect determination process at the time of start winning of the first embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the symbol stop period and the symbol fixed period. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not a winning blackout effect is to be executed, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not a winning flash effect is to be executed and the manner of effect. FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a chance eye effect and the mode of effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a comment announcement effect and the mode of effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the final display mode of active display; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of a change effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of a change effect; 10 is a time chart showing execution timings of effects relating to a blackout effect at the time of winning, a connection zone effect, a flash effect at the time of winning, a chance effect, a comment notice effect, and a change effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of effects relating to winning blackout effect, connection zone effect, winning flash effect, chance eye effect, comment notice effect, and change effect; It is a time chart showing execution timings of effects relating to winning flash effect, chance effect, comment notice effect, and change effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode relating to a win-time flash effect, a chance effect, a comment notice effect, and a change effect; It is a flow chart showing an example of the effect determination process at the time of start winning of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of the effect determination process at the time of start winning of the second embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to a prize-winning role performance, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to a blessing role performance.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

In addition, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win state during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative design is also called the probability variable design, and the even-numbered decorative design is also called the non-probable variable design (normal design). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display or active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

Even during the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed for informing the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. In addition, even during the small winning game state, the effect during the small winning to report the small winning game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Main Actions of Effect Control Board 12) Next, main actions of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 078IW) Next, the characteristic portion 078IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characterizing part 078IW, as a game state, it is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state (also controlled in a time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average normal figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, compared to the normal state Increases the probability of winning in the normal game. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 10%, while in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is increased to 90%, and the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). easier to do. In addition, not only such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, compared with the normal state, by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) It may be configured so that game balls can easily win prizes.

In addition, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to a probability variable state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variation display result is a big hit and is controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game, even if the variation display result is a loss, the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a time saving state based on what has been done.

(board configuration)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 078IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 078IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed informing LED 078IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, fourth pattern displays 078IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among them, the fourth symbol display 078IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display for executing the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Also, the fourth symbol display 078IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth pattern display devices 078IW21a and 21b are each composed of two vertically arranged LEDs, and by alternately turning on and off these two LEDs, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed. be.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability, time saving probability)
FIG. 8-2 and FIG. 8-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the short time loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 8-2 shows the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 8-3 shows the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the short-time loss probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) can be set. Setting confirmation processing and setting change processing can be executed to check the current set values and change the set values. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 (A) and 8-3 (A), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/320), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "328/65536". It is high (approximately 1/200) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variation state ( In the high probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest (approximately 1/32) jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "3280/65536". It is high (approximately 1/20) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, in this example, the probability of a big hit is ten times higher in the variable probability state than in the non-variable probability state.

On the other hand, with respect to the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-2, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the set value "1" to "6" (further , Regardless of whether it is a probability variation state or a non-probability variation state), the small hit probability is constant at “164/65536” (about 1/400). Also, as shown in FIG. 8-3, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the small hit probability is constant at "9362/65536" (about 1/7). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-2, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “164/65536” (about 1/400). Also, as shown in FIG. 8-3, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “328/65536” (about 1/200). That is, in the present example, the determination value for time saving deviation determination is common regardless of the set value.

As described above, while changing the big hit probability according to the set value, even if the small hit probability and the time saving probability are configured to be constant, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 By varying the set value "1" to "6", it is sufficient to configure the number of judgment values for each set value to match.

In addition, the example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 is an example, and various aspects can be considered as how to set the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the time reduction probability. For example, it may be configured such that there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 8-2), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol When executing the display, the time saving probability is about 1/200, but on the contrary, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is about 1/200, In the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability of losing time may be set to about 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-4(B) shows a specific example of the big hit type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 100 times of variable display is completed or the next big hit occurs.

A "variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a 15-round big-hit game state and is shifted to a variable-probability state after the big-hit game state ends. When it shifts to the definite variable state, it maintains the definite variable state until the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

The "suddenly variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a two-round big win game state and is shifted to a variable probability state after the big win game state is ended. When it shifts to the definite variable state, it maintains the definite variable state until the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "variable probability jackpot", in each round of 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of the game The big winning hole is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the big winning hole is performed 15 times). On the other hand, when the "sudden probability variable jackpot" occurs, in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game, the big prize opening is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds (therefore, the big prize opening is opened for a short period of time). opening is performed twice). Therefore, in the event of a "suddenly variable probability big hit", it is possible to make it appear as if a sudden transition to a variable probability state has occurred, since it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to be won in the big winning slot.

Also, in this example, even when a "small win" is achieved, the large winning opening is opened twice for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds during the small win game. The opening of the big winning opening is performed in a similar manner.

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, it is determined to be a "normal big win" with a probability of 40%. It is determined as a "variable probability big hit" with a probability, and determined as a "sudden variable probability big hit" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, it is determined as a "normal big win" with a probability of 40%. A probability of 5% is determined as a "variable probability big hit", and a probability of 5% is determined as a "suddenly variable probability big hit".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Of these, FIG. 8-5(A) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5(B) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the time saving is lost, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the time saving In any case of loss, with a probability of 1/3 it is determined to be "time saving A", with a probability of 1/3 it is decided to be "time saving B", and with a probability of 1/3 "time saving C" is determined.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 8-5 is an example, and various aspects can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability of "time saving C" is increased, while if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the second special symbol, "time saving The determination ratio of the time reduction type may be made different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as by increasing the determination probability of "loss A".

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 8-6, in this example, in the normal state, when it becomes "time saving deviation A", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving times, and when it becomes "time saving deviation B", the number of time saving times 50 It is controlled to the time saving state of times, and when it becomes "time saving deviation C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times of the number of time saving. Also, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving A", it is controlled to the time saving state until the next big hit, and when it becomes "time saving B", it is controlled to the time saving state with the number of times of 200 times, "time saving is off" C”, it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 time saving times.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off during the variable probability state.

In addition, the method of controlling the number of times of working hours reduction in the case of failure to reduce working hours is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-6. For example, even if the same time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured so that it is the same at 100 time-saving times during the normal state and during the time-saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the number of times of time saving is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is, It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes are conceivable as a method of controlling the number of times of time saving when such time saving is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
8-7 and 8-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic part 078IW. Among them, FIG. 8-7(A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big wins and small wins. Also, FIG. 8-7(B) shows a specific example of the deviation pattern table B in the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-7(C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit. In addition, FIG. 8-7 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for loss during the time saving state controlled via time saving loss. Further, FIG. 8-8(E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for loss in the probability variation state. However, in this example, even if the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending storage is not 1 or more (if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B is used to determine the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in this example, when a big hit or a small hit occurs, the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the big hit, the variation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened variation), variation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (D), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation), Variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 8-7 (C) and 8-7 (D), in this example, during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) are determined The rate of change is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via a big hit, compared to the time-saving state controlled via time-saving deviation, the selection probability of the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80. %, and the average fluctuation time is short.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the probability variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (E), in this example, in the probability variation state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further averaged than in the time-saving state. is getting shorter.

It should be noted that the method of setting the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8 is an example, and various modes are conceivable. For example, if the time saving is lost during the time saving state and is controlled again to the time saving state, it is the same as the variation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) A table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Also, for example, only if the time saving state continues until the next big hit in the case of the time saving loss (in this example, if the time saving loss A occurs during the time saving state), the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) A variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for deviation during the time saving state controlled by .

(Production control command)
8-9 and 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, the command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that designates the variation pattern of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. (fluctuation pattern command). It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives one of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decoration pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (off specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is lost (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time reduction A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is time saving A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time reduction B designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction B. be. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time reduction C designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction C. be.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specification command (probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a probability variation big hit. Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a probability variation big hit. .

The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A specification command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and specifying that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol determination C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

Command B300 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) that designates the start of a small hit game. Command B301 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state when time saving is lost. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (variable probability state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to a variable probability state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that designates the start of the right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) that designates the end of the right-handed notification.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-9 and FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. FIG. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIGS. 8-11 and 8-12 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step 078IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the combined reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 078IWS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 078IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 078IWS54).

In this characterizing portion 078IW, by executing the processing of steps 078IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 078IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 078IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 078IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for winning determination from the random number buffer area (step 078IWS61), and executes the big winning determination module (step 078IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot when they match. It's a program. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, the CPU 103, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if the probability state is low), the jackpot determination value for low probability (FIG. 8-2 (A) and FIG. 8-3 (A) reference) is used to determine the big hit. In addition, CPU103, if the probability variation flag is set (if the high probability state), using the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B)) Judge the jackpot. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of step 078IWS63), the process proceeds to step 078IWS64. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a big hit (N at step 078IWS63), the process proceeds to step 078IWS66. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, and determining whether or not the stop symbols on the special symbol display device are to be the big win symbols. But also.

At step 078 IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal big win, variable probability big win, sudden variable probability big win) corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area as the type of the big win (step 078IWS65). Incidentally, in this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS74.

On the other hand, in step 078IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-2 is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is "second ” is shown, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-3 is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small win determination table to perform lottery processing based on the hit determination random number, and determines whether or not to make a small win (step 078IWS67).

When it is determined to be a small hit (Y of step 078IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small win (step 078IWS69). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS74.

If it is not determined to be a small hit (N of step 078IWS68), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 078IWS70). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 078IWS74. In this example, by executing the process of step 078IWS, if it is in the probability variable state, without performing the time saving loss determination process after step 078IWS71, it is determined to be a time saving without loss as it is be.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variation state), the CPU 103 uses the time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving loss is determined, lottery processing based on the random number for time saving loss determination and determines whether or not it is time-saving (step 078IWS71). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and the time saving loss is determined with a probability of about 1/400. (See Figure 8-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", select the time-saving loss determination table for the second special symbol, and decide to make the time-saving loss with a probability of about 1/200 ( (see Figure 8-3).

If it is determined to be time saving (Y in step 078 IWS72), the CPU 103 determines the type (time saving A or time saving) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area B, time-saving loss C) is determined as a type of time-saving loss (step 078IWS73). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first and second reserve storage buffers, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS74.

In addition, in step 078IWS73, time-saving type determination is performed using the random number for type determination common to the random number for type determination used by jackpot type determination of step 078IWS65, and the random number for type determination. Furthermore, when configured to determine the small hit type, in addition to the big hit type determination and time saving type determination, even in the small hit type determination, if configured to perform determination processing using a common type determination random number good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a big win type, a small win type, and a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the time saving type (step 078IWS74). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and when it is determined to be a probability variable jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "7". When it is decided to make a sudden variable probability big hit, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided to be ``9'', and when it is decided to be a small hit, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided to be ``1''. When it is determined to be time-saving deviation A, the stop pattern of the special design is determined to be "2", and when it is determined to be time-saving deviation B, the special symbol to be stopped is determined to be "4". Then, when it is determined to be time-saving loss C, the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "6", and when it is determined to be loss (no time-saving), the special symbol stop symbol is "-". and decide. Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 078IWS75).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 078IWS76).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 8-13 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (step 078IWS1701). If the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the big hit and small hit variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 8-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 078 IWS 1702).

If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (that is, if the win is lost), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 078IWS1703). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 8-8 (E) Select E (step 078 IWS 1704). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table E on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 078IWS1705). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via a big hit), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, and via the big hit shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) A variation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state is selected (step 078IWS1706). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 078IWS1707). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 8-7 (D) It selects the variation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 078IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and determines the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) Select table B (step 078IWS1709).

Next, the CPU 103 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 078IWS1702, S1704, S1706, S1708, and S1709 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. , 8-7 and 8-8 (step 078IWS1710). In this example, by determining the variation pattern, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1711).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 078IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 078IWS1712), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 078IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 078IWS1714).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a small hit. Based on the result, the determination result of the jackpot type, and the determination result of the time saving type, control to transmit any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 8 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 078IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 078IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be short of working hours (step 078IWS1123). 078IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area at step 078IWS75, for example.

If it is determined to be time-saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS1125). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 078IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right-handed LED078IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 078IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 is a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 078IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1129). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS1134.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 is a design confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop design of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 078IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1131). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In that case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS1134.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 078 IWS1124), the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer to "0" for measuring the determination display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. .5 seconds” is set (step 078IWS1132). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1133). . In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS1134.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 078IWS1134).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step 078IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 078IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. It is checked whether or not it is set (step 078IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, sets the probability variable flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, and the time saving number counter for counting the number of execution times of the variable display during the time saving state. Reset (step 078IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS135). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS136).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS137). Next, the CPU 103 sets a pre-opening big winning hole timer for measuring the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 078IWS138). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 078IWS139).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N of step 078IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step 078IWS140). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time saving number counter value (step 078IWS141). Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving frequency counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 078IWS142). If the value of the time saving frequency counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B and terminates the time saving state (step 078IWS143).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to terminate lighting of the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS144). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS145). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS146).

It should be noted that, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 078IWS140 ~ S146, it shows a case where the right-handed notification is terminated with the transition to the normal state at the end of the pattern fixed period in the time saving final variation, but such It is not limited to any form. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 078IWS147). When the small-hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small-hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS148). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before the opening of the big winning opening (step 078IWS149). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118) (step 078IWS150).

If the small hit flag is not set (that is, if the win is lost), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a time-saving loss (step 078IWS151). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area at step 078IWS75, for example. If it is not decided to lose the time saving (that is, if it is the case of losing (no time saving)), the process proceeds to step 078IWS167.

If it is determined to be out of time saving, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 078IWS152). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving number counter if the time saving is out of A (Y in step 078IWS153) (step 078IWS154). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" if it is time saving failure B (step 078IWS155). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If it is not time saving loss B (that is, if time saving loss C), the CPU 103 sets "30" to the time saving frequency counter (step 078IWS157). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving deviation A (Y in step 078 IWS 158) ( step 078 IWS 159). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "200" if it is time saving failure B (step 078IWS160) (step 078IWS161). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

If it is not time saving loss B (that is, if it is time saving loss C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "100" (step 078IWS162). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS163.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 078IWS163). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B to control the time saving state (step 078IWS164). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state B specification command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 078IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 controls an external device such as a hall computer to start outputting the jackpot 2 signal (step 078IWS166).

By executing the processing of steps 078 IWS164 and S165, in this example, when the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the symbol fixing period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image is switched to the background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving. In addition, by executing the process of step 078IWS166, external output of two jackpot signals is started at the end of the symbol fixing period.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 078IWS167).

(external output signal)
8-17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-17, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among them, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output to the outside during the jackpot game. Also, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is externally output during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Also, the big hit 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the time-saving pattern fixing period. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is externally output at the start of the symbol fixing period.

In this example, in addition to the case of shifting to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed, so there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol fixation period, external output of two jackpot signals is started (see step 078IWS166).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 8-18 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 078IWS531), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 078IWS535. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 078IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 078IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 in the big win end display timer (step 078IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

At step 078IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 078IWS536). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 078IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 078IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot to be finished this time is a normal jackpot (step 078IWS538). Incidentally, whether or not the game is a normal big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area at step 078IWS75. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 078IWS539). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state A specification command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 078IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a variable probability flag and controls the variable probability state (step 078IWS541). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the variable probability state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS542).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 078IWS543).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in this characterizing portion 078IW will be described. FIG. 8-19 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in this characteristic part 078IW. As shown in FIG. 8-19, in the normal state, if the probability variation jackpot or suddenly the probability variation jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variation state (see step 078IWS541), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving state A (via the jackpot time saving state) (see step 078IWS537-S539). Also, even in the normal state, if the time saving pattern is derived and displayed even if it is lost, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 078IWS164).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-19, in the probability variation state, if the probability variation big hit or the probability variation big hit suddenly occurs, it is controlled again to the probability variation state (see step 078IWS541), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving state A (Time-saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see step 078IWS537-S539). On the other hand, in the variable probability state, there is no case where the time-saving loss symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 078IWS70).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-19, in the time saving state A, when the probability variation jackpot or suddenly probability variation jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variation state (see step 078IWS541), and when it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving state again It is controlled to A (time saving state via big hit) (see steps 078IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time saving state A, even if it is lost, if the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 078IWS164). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 100 fluctuation displays are completed without occurrence of a big hit, control is made to the time-saving state (see steps 078IWS140 to S143).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-19, in the time saving state B, when the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see step 078IWS541), and when it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving state A (Time-saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see step 078IWS537-S539). Also, in the time saving state B, even if it is lost, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled again to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 078IWS164). In addition, in the time saving state A, when the variable display is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without occurrence of a big hit, control is made to the time saving state (see steps 078IWS140 to S143). However, when the time saving state is shifted to the time saving state B due to the time saving deviation A during the time saving state, the time saving state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 078IWS158, S159).

In addition, in this example, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time saving is compared with the number of times of saving time corresponding to the determined type of time saving, and if the remaining number of the current number of times of saving time is larger, the current state of time saving A is continued as it is. may

In addition, in this example, when a normal jackpot occurs in the time saving state B, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving and the number of times of saving time corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving is larger, continue the current time saving state B as it is It may be configured to

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 8-20 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 078IW. 8-20, the processes of steps S71-S76 are similar to those processes shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process (step 078IWS701). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process in step 078IWS701, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is performed on the fourth symbol display 078IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is performed on the fourth symbol display 078IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5. FIG.

The processing of step S77 is the same as the processing of step S77 shown in FIG.

(4th pattern)
FIG. 8-21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display of the fourth symbol and the display mode of the stop symbol executed in the fourth symbol process processing of step 078IWS701. When the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-21(A), two vertically arranged LEDs are alternately lit and extinguished in the fourth pattern display 078IW21a, 21b. is repeated, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed.

In addition, when the fluctuation time ends, the stopped design of the fourth design is fixedly displayed at the start of the design fixing period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), when a big win is achieved, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the big win symbols are stopped and displayed in red light. Further, when a small win is achieved, two LEDs arranged vertically as a small win symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in green. In addition, when the time saving is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time saving pattern are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. In addition, when it becomes a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below as a loss symbol (no time saving) are stopped and displayed in an extinguished state.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. good too.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the case of providing a dedicated pattern as the time saving pattern of the fourth pattern is shown, but not limited to such an aspect, the case of the big hit and the time saving pattern In some cases, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be a common symbol.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 8-22 and 8-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main substrate 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 078IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 078IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 078IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 078IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 078IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 078IWS616).

If the received production control command is a display result designation command (step 078IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 078IWS618 ).

The received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination A designation command, first design determination B designation command, first design determination C designation command, second design determination A designation command, second design determination B designation command, second design determination C designation command) (step 078IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a determination command reception flag corresponding to the received design determination designation command (step 078IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first symbol decision B designation command is received, the first decision B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol decision B designation command is received, the second decision B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 078IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 078IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 078IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 078IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 078IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 078IWS626). If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 078IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 078IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a normal state designation command (step 078IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode). (step 078IWS632).

If the received production control command is the time saving state A designation command (step 078IWS633), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, the sunset A yellow background image corresponding to the mode) is controlled (step 078IWS634).

If the received production control command is the time saving state B designation command (step 078IWS635), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, A green background image corresponding to the forest mode) is controlled (step 078IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a variable probability state designation command (step 078IWS637), the effect control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the variable probability state (for example, the red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 078IWS638).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 078IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 078IW20 (step 078IWS640). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed (see step 078IWS1126). Lighting of the strike notification LED 078IW20 is started.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 078IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed notification LED 078IW20 (step 078IWS642).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received production control command, or executes processing for setting a flag corresponding to the received production control command (step 078IWS643 ). For example, in the case of receiving a large winning opening winning designation command, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-24 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 078IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 078IWS802). That is, by executing the processing of step 078IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 078IWS802, selects a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol for the pseudo-run. , a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern) is also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 078IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the hit is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

At step 078 IWS802, when the received display result specifying command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 selects a decorative pattern in which the three patterns are the same even number pattern as the stop pattern. A combination (usually a big hit pattern) is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variable big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration patterns (probability variable big hit pattern) in which 3 patterns are the same odd number patterns as the stop pattern. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "suddenly variable probability big hit" or "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 sets the combination of "135" decorative symbols (small hit/suddenly variable probability) as the stop symbol. determine the jackpot pattern).

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, a stop pattern (a combination of patterns in which the left, middle, and right are all the same pattern) that reminds us of a big win is called a big hit pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same odd-numbered patterns) reminiscent of the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same even-numbered patterns) reminiscent of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds us of a loss is called a lost symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 078IWS803). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS804).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 078IWS805). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 078IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decoration pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 078IWS806).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 078IWS807).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 078IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 078IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 078IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 078IWS844). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 078IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received (step 078IWS846). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed A command reception flag or the second fixed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A specified command or the second symbol confirmation A specified command is received, the effect control CPU 120 is a mode transition effect (effect to inform that it shifts to a time saving state (time saving mode)) and right hitting A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 078IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 078IWS849). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 078IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS862.

If neither the first design determination A designation command nor the second design determination A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first design determination B designation command or the second design determination B designation command. (Step 078IWS851). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed B command reception flag or the second fixed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination B designation command or the second symbol determination B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the continuous effect (effect for notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 078IWS852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 078IWS854). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 078IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (Step 078IWS856). Specifically, it is checked whether the first fixed C command reception flag or the second fixed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command is received, the process proceeds to step 078IWS858.

If neither the first symbol determination C designation command nor the second symbol determination C designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 078IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y of step 078IWS856), or when the variable time timer times out (Y of step 078IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 normally (step 078IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 078IWS860). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 second to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 078IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 078IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the pattern confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 078IWS857), the processing after step 078IWS858 is shifted to the pattern confirmation period. Normally, however, if the pattern confirmation designating command is not missed, it is judged as Y in step 078IWS857, and there is no case where the processing after step 078IWS858 is performed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 078IWS862).

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28 are flowcharts showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 078IWS871), and confirms whether the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 078 IWS 872). If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 078IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 078IWS874).

Also, when the process timer times out (step 078IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 078IWS876). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stationary symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed (step 078IWS878). If the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is being displayed, the process is terminated. If the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop pattern (loss pattern (no time saving), time saving loss pattern, big hit pattern, small hit pattern). (Step 078IWS879).

When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the process of step 078IWS879 (Y in step 078IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 078IWS881). Then, the process ends.

When the small winning design is stopped and displayed in the process of step 078IWS879 (Y of step 078IWS882), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small winning stop flag indicating that the small winning design has been confirmed and displayed (step 078IWS883). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the pattern fixed period has passed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 078IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has received a jackpot start designation command (step 078IWS885). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 078IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 078IWS886). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the jackpot including the mode transition effect (effect for notifying the transition to the variable probability state (variable probability mode) and the short time state (short time mode)) and the notification of hitting to the right. (step 078IWS887). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 078IWS888), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), the control of the performance device (the image display device 5 as the performance component, various lamps as the performance component, and the speaker 27 as the performance component) is controlled (step 078IWS889).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit (step 078IWS890).

If the big hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit stop flag is set (step 078IWS891). If the small hit stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit start designation command is received (step 078IWS892). Whether or not the small hit start designation command is received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small hit start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 078IWS893). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small winning effect (step 078IWS894). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 078IWS895), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance device (the image display device 5 as the performance component, various lamps as the performance component, and the speaker 27 as the performance component) is controlled (step 078IWS896).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit (step 078IWS897).

If the small hit stop flag is not set (that is, if the lost pattern (no time saving) or the time saving lost pattern is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 waits for the start of variable display of the value of the effect control process flag. It is updated to a value according to the process (step S170) (step 078IWS898).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode when shifting to the time saving state will be described. FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of an effect mode when transitioning to the time saving state. Among them, FIGS. 8-29 and 8-30 show a specific example of an effect mode when transitioning to the time saving state via a big hit. In addition, FIG. 8-31 shows a specific example of the effect mode in the case of shifting to the time saving state via the time saving loss. In addition, in FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

First, with reference to FIGS. 8-29 and 8-30, a specific example of an effect mode when transitioning to the time saving state via a big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-29(A), in the image display device 5, a normal jackpot pattern (in this example, a combination of "666" patterns) is derived and displayed as a stop pattern of the decoration pattern, and the jackpot game starts. It is assumed that the period (fanfare period) has shifted. In this example, 20 seconds are secured as the fanfare period of the jackpot game, and during the fanfare period, as shown in FIG. ). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), the character image 078IW30 is displayed on the image display device 5, and text display 078IW31 such as "shift to sunset mode" is displayed as the character's lines. By doing so, the mode transition effect is executed, and the shift to the time saving state A is informed.

In addition, in this example, when the jackpot game is started, the lighting of the right-handed LED 078IW10 is started (see step 078IWS135), and the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 078IW20 is also started (see step 078IWS640). At the same time, as shown in 29(B), the image display device 5 also starts displaying a right-handed hitting icon image 078IW40.

Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the fanfare period, as shown in FIG. 8-29(C), the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right (see step 078IWS887). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-29(C), the image display device 5 displays a character display 078IW32 such as "Right shot!"

Then, when the fanfare period has passed, as shown in FIG. 8-29(D), a character display 078IW33 such as "Jumping in!" is displayed, and the game shifts to the round period of the jackpot game. Then, when the big hit game is completed, it is shifted to the time saving state A, and as shown in FIG. (see step 078IWS634). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-30(E), "sunset mode" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to a yellow display color.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-31, a specific example of the effect mode when transitioning to the time saving state via the time saving loss will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-31(A), in the image display device 5, a time-saving lost pattern (in this example, a combination of lost patterns including a special pattern (star pattern)) is derived and displayed as a stop pattern of decorative patterns. shall be In this example, 20 seconds are secured as the symbol confirmation period for the time-saving design, and during the symbol confirmation period, as shown in FIG. See step 078 IWS847). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-31(B), the character image 078IW34 is displayed on the image display device 5, and text display 078IW35 such as "Transition to forest mode" is displayed as the character's lines. As a result, the mode transition effect is executed, and the transition to the time saving state B is notified.

Further, in this example, at the start of the symbol determination period when the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right-handed LED078IW10 is started (see step 078IWS1125), and the lighting of the right-handed notification LED078IW20 is also started (step 078IWS640). ), but at the same time, as shown in FIG. 8-31(B), the image display device 5 also starts displaying a right-handed hitting icon image 078IW41.

Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 8-31(C), the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right (see step 078IWS847). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-31(C), the image display device 5 displays a character display 078IW36 such as "Right hit!"

Then, when the pattern confirmation period has passed, it is shifted to the time saving state B, and as shown in FIG. (see step 078IWS636). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-31(D), "Forest Mode" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to a green display color.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31, the right-handed icon images 078IW40 and 41 are displayed when the right-handed LED 078IW10 and right-handed notification LED 078IW20 start lighting. The images 078IW40 and 41 start to be displayed in conjunction with the lighting of the right-handed LED 078IW10 and the right-handed notification LED 078IW20, and disappear in conjunction with the right-handed LED 078IW10 and the right-handed notification LED 078IW20 being extinguished.

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of various effects in this characterizing portion 078IW will be described. FIGS. 8-32 and 8-33 are timing charts for explaining the execution timings of various effects in this characterizing portion 078IW. Among them, FIG. 8-32(A) shows execution timings of various effects in the case of a big win (normal big win). Also, FIG. 8-32(B) shows execution timings of various effects in the case of a failure (no time reduction) during the normal state. Also, FIG. 8-33(A) shows execution timings of various effects in the case of time saving during the normal state. In addition, FIG. 8-33 (B) shows execution timings of various effects when the time saving is lost during the time saving state.

First, with reference to FIG. 8-32(A), the execution timing of various effects in the case of a big win (normal big win) will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-32(A), in the case of a big win (normal big win), when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is terminated and the big winning symbol (normal big winning symbol) is stopped and displayed, the value is 0.5. The jackpot symbols are confirmed and displayed for a short symbol confirmation period of seconds (see step 078IWS1132). In addition, in the case of a big win, 20 seconds are secured as a fanfare period of the big win game, and during the fanfare period, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-32(A). (see step 078IWS887). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the fanfare period, as shown in FIG. 8-32(A), the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right (see step 078IWS887). Next, when the fanfare period has passed, the round period and interval period of the big win game are repeated, and when all the rounds are finished and the ending period is finished (when the big win game is finished), the state is shifted to the time saving state A, as shown in FIG. 8-32. As shown in (A), in the image display device 5, the background image (in this example, the background image of the yellow display color) corresponding to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is switched (see step 078IWS634) .

The example shown in FIG. 8-32(A) shows the case of a normal jackpot. The background image (in this example, the background image with the display color of red) is switched to (see step 078IWS638).

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-32(B), the execution timing of various effects in the case of a failure (no time reduction) in the normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), if it is lost (no time saving) in the normal state, the variable display of the special pattern and decorative pattern is terminated, and the missing pattern (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, A lost symbol (no time reduction) is determined and displayed over a short symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 078IWS1132). Further, when the pattern fixing period ends, the background image corresponding to the normal state (in this example, the background image with the display color of blue) is continuously displayed (see step 078IWS632).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), it shows the case where it is lost during the normal state (no time saving), but for example, when it is lost during the probability variable state (no time saving), the variation Since the background image (in this example, the background image of the red display color) is displayed according to the probability change state before the start, the background image (in this example) , background image with a red display color) is displayed continuously. Also, for example, when it is out of the time saving state A (no time saving), a background image (in this example, a yellow display color background image) corresponding to the time saving state A is displayed before the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the background image corresponding to the time-saving state A (in this example, the background image of the yellow display color) is continuously displayed even after the end of the pattern fixing period. Also, for example, when it is out of the time saving state B (no time saving), a background image (in this example, a green display color background image) corresponding to the time saving state B is displayed before the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the background image corresponding to the time-saving state B (in this example, the background image of the green display color) is continuously displayed even after the pattern fixing period ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-33(A), the execution timing of various effects in the case of time saving during the normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-33 (A), when the time saving is lost in the normal state, the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is terminated, and when the time saving lost pattern is stopped and displayed, the design confirmation period of 20 seconds Over time, the time-saving lost symbol is confirmed and displayed (see step 078IWS1128). Also, during the pattern fixing period, as shown in FIG. 8-33(A), the image display device 5 executes a mode transition effect (see step 078IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 8-33(A), the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right (see step 078IWS847). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has elapsed, the transition to the time saving state B is performed, and as shown in FIG. (In this example, the background image has a green display color) (see step 078IWS636).

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-33(B), the execution timing of various effects when the time saving is lost during the time saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), when the time saving is lost during the time saving state, the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is terminated, and when the time saving lost pattern is stopped and displayed, the pattern confirmation period of 10 seconds Over time, the time-saving lost symbol is confirmed and displayed (see step 078IWS1130). Further, during the symbol fixing period, as shown in FIG. 8-33(B), the image display device 5 executes the continuous effect (see step 078IWS852). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has elapsed, the transition to the time saving state B is performed, and as shown in FIG. (In this example, the background image has a green display color) (see step 078IWS636).

In this example, if the time saving is lost A during the time saving state, the time saving state is continued until the next big hit. In this case, for example, "∞" is displayed in the continuous production , it may be configured to suggest that the time saving state continues until the next big hit.

(Modification 1)
In the above characteristic part 078IW, even if the same time saving is lost, the case where the pattern confirmation period is different depending on whether it is in the normal state or in the time saving state (20 seconds and 10 seconds) was shown, Not limited to such a mode, the pattern fixing period may be uniformly set to the same period. FIG. 8-34 is a timing chart for explaining execution timings of various effects in Modification 1. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8-34(A) shows execution timings of various effects in the case of time saving during the normal state. In addition, FIG. 8-34 (B) shows execution timings of various effects when the time saving is lost during the time saving state.

In the modified example 1, as shown in FIG. 8-34(A), the execution timing of various effects in the case of time saving during the normal state is the same as that in FIG. 8-33(A). In the modified example 1, when the time saving is lost during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-34(B), the continuous effect is executed over the symbol fixing period of 20 seconds. The processing load can be reduced by sharing the pattern fixing period between the normal state and the time saving state in this way.

In addition, in the modification 1, a case is shown in which the pattern fixing period is made common to 20 seconds when the time-saving state is out of time during the normal state and during the time-saving state, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, during the normal state and during the time saving state, the pattern confirmation period when the time saving is lost is made common to 0.5 seconds, and even if the time saving is lost, the mode transition effect, the right-handed notification, and the continuous effect are not executed. may be configured.

(Modification 2)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 078IW, when the time saving is lost during the time saving state, since it is already in the time saving state, 10 seconds shorter than during the normal state are secured as the pattern fixing period, and continuous production is executed. Although the case of notifying that the time saving state continues is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. FIG. 8-35 is a timing chart for explaining execution timings of various effects in Modification 2. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8-35(A) shows execution timings of various effects in the case of time saving during the normal state. In addition, FIG. 8-35 (B) shows the execution timing of various effects in the case that the time saving is lost during the time saving state.

In the modified example 2, as shown in FIG. 8-35(A), execution timings of various effects in the case of time saving during the normal state are the same as those in FIG. 8-33(A). In the modification 2, if the time saving is lost during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. can be configured to Even with such a configuration, since the time-saving state continues before the start of the variation that causes the time-saving loss, there is little possibility that the player will not be able to recognize the game state even if the continuous performance is not executed. , no trouble occurs.

(Modification 3)
FIG. 8-36 is a flow chart showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in Modification 3. As shown in FIG. In the third modification, as shown in FIG. 8-36, the determination process of step 078IWS70 is not provided in the special symbol normal process, and regardless of whether it is a probability variable state, the time saving after step 078IWS71 is out of uniform. Judgment processing is executed. However, in the third modification, as shown in FIG. 8-36, it is determined that the time saving is off (Y in step 078IWS72), and when the time saving type is determined (step 078IWS73), the CPU 103 is set with a probability variation flag It is checked whether or not there is (step 078IWS73X). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 does not move to step 078IWS74, and forcibly determines the design (no time reduction) as the stop design of the special design (step 078IWS74X ). Even if it is configured like the processing flow of FIG. 8-36, it can be configured not to derive and display the time-saving off symbol when it is in the variable probability state.

In addition, in modification 3, the other processing of the special symbol normal processing is the same as the processing shown in the characteristic portion 078IW described above.

(Modification 4)
In the above characteristic part 078IW, when the time saving is lost, the case where the lighting of the right-handed LED 078IW10 and the right-handed notification LED 078IW20 is started at the start of the symbol determination period is shown. You may comprise so that lighting of right hitting LED078IW10 and right hitting information LED078IW20 may be started at the time of the end of. FIG. 8-37 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) in Modification 4. FIG.

In modification 4, the processing of steps 078IWS1125 and S1126 is not executed in the special symbol variation processing. Instead, in the special symbol stop processing, when the CPU 103 performs control to start external output of the big win 2 signal (step 078IWS166), it performs control to start lighting of the right hitting LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS166A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 078IWS166B).

By executing the process of step 078IWS166A, in modification 4, when the time saving is lost, lighting of the right-handed LED078IW10 is started at the end of the symbol fixing period. In addition, by executing the process of step 078IWS166B, in the fourth modification, when the time saving is lost, the right hitting notification start designation command is transmitted at the end of the symbol determination period. Lighting of the strike notification LED 078IW20 is started (see steps 078IWS639 and S640).

In addition, in modification 4, other processes of the special symbol variation process and the special symbol stop process are the same as the processes shown in the characteristic part 078IW.

(Modification 5)
FIG. 8-38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern table in Modification 5. FIG. In this example, the fluctuation pattern tables A, B, and E are the same as the fluctuation pattern tables A, B, and E shown in the characteristic portion 078IW.

In the above feature part 078IW, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via a big hit, compared to the time-saving state when controlled via time-saving deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is as high as 80% and the average fluctuation time is short. On the other hand, in example 5, as shown in FIGS. Compared to the time-saving state controlled via the big hit, the selection probability of the variation pattern PA1-2 (super-shortening variation) is as high as 80%, and the average variation time is short.

As described above, the characteristic portion 078IW and each modification disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means A1-1), (means A1-2) to (means A11) .

As a gaming machine, game balls, which are game media, are shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player.

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Some of such gaming machines are configured to be able to display a second predetermined result that triggers control to a special state. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-210152 (paragraph 0029) describes a display mode in which the stop symbol is different from the special display mode, such as "6,6,7", "4,4,5", "1,2, 3”, the variable time (5 to 10 seconds) of the special symbol display device is shortened to a shorter predetermined time (eg, 2 seconds), and such time reduction is performed a predetermined number of times (eg, 30 times). Continuous repetition is described. Further, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2002-253794 (paragraphs 0046 and 0047) describes that the number of times of time saving is determined based on the reach pattern if the time saving mode is not set when the reach is lost.

By applying the game machines described in JP-A-2002-210152 and JP-A-2002-253794, the special state is controlled by the display of the second predetermined result without going through the control to the advantageous state. be able to. However, it is necessary to ensure the execution period of the notification effect for notifying the start of the control to the special state. On the other hand, if the second predetermined result is displayed in the special state in order to ensure the execution period of the notification effect, if the display period of the second predetermined result is lengthened, the variable display efficiency will decrease. There's a problem. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine described below aims to provide a gaming machine capable of ensuring the execution period of the notification effect in the non-special state and enhancing the interest in the game.

(Means A1-1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game, which performs a variable display based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, winning of a game ball in a first start winning opening or a second starting winning opening). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S112 and S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that executes and can display the display result of the variable display, and a specific result (for example, a big hit pattern) as the display result of the variable display ) is displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) ), After being controlled to an advantageous state, it is a state different from the advantageous state and a special state (for example, a normal state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than a non-special state (for example, a time-saving state). State control means (for example, step 078IWS164 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes S537 to S539), and the variable display execution means is a predetermined result different from the specific result as the display result of the variable display (for example , lost pattern) can be displayed, and as the predetermined result, the first predetermined result (for example, the lost pattern (no time reduction)) that does not trigger the control of the special state, and the second predetermined result that triggers the control of the special state (For example, time-saving design) and can be displayed, and in the non-special state, the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds) is the display period of the first predetermined result (for example, 0.5 seconds) Longer than (see, for example, FIGS. 8-32 (B) and 8-33 (A)), in the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state, notification effect to notify the start of the control of the special state (For example, mode transition effect) is provided with a notification effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120), and the display period of the second predetermined result in the special state (for example, 10 seconds) , is shorter than the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state (see, for example, FIGS. 8-33 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the execution period of the notification effect in the non-special state, and to improve the interest in the game, and the display period of the first predetermined result and the display period of the second predetermined result in the special state. can be shortened, and the variable display efficiency can be improved.

(Means A1-2) A gaming machine capable of playing a game, which performs a variable display based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, winning of a game ball in a first start winning opening or a second starting winning opening). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S112 and S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that executes and can display the display result of the variable display, and a specific result (for example, a big hit pattern) as the display result of the variable display ) is displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) ), After being controlled to an advantageous state, it is a state different from the advantageous state and a special state (for example, a normal state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than a non-special state (for example, a time-saving state). State control means (for example, step 078IWS164 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes S537 to S539), and the variable display execution means is a predetermined result different from the specific result as the display result of the variable display (for example , lost pattern) can be displayed, and as the predetermined result, the first predetermined result (for example, the lost pattern (no time reduction)) that does not trigger the control of the special state, and the second predetermined result that triggers the control of the special state (For example, time-saving design) and can be displayed, and in the non-special state, the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds) is the display period of the first predetermined result (for example, 0.5 seconds) Longer than (see, for example, FIGS. 8-32 (B) and 8-33 (A)), in the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state, notification effect to notify the start of the control of the special state (For example, mode transition effect) can be executed notification effect execution means (for example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120), and display period information that can specify the display period of the display result of the variable display (for example, pattern confirmation designation command) can be output (for example, step 078IWS1129, S1131, S1133 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the information output means is a display period of the first predetermined result can be specified (for example, the first symbol confirmation C designation command, the second symbol confirmation C designation command), and the second display period information that can identify the display period of the second predetermined result ( For example, a first symbol determination A designation command, a second symbol determination A designation command, a first symbol determination B designation command, a second symbol determination B designation command) are output as different display period information, and a second symbol determination B designation command in a special state is output. The display period of the predetermined result is a period common to the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state (for example, in Modification 1, as shown in FIG. 8-34, during the normal state and during the time saving state The symbol determination period is common for 20 seconds), the notification effect execution means executes the notification effect based on the second display period information (for example, the effect control CPU 120, when it is determined as Y in step 078IWS846, step 078IWS847). According to such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the execution period of the notification effect in the non-special state, improve the interest in the game, and execute the notification effect at an appropriate timing. Further, since the display period of the second predetermined result is a common period regardless of the game state, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the control means by sharing the processing.

(Means A2) In means A1-1 and A1-2, there is Closed state) and variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7), the advantageous state control means controls the variable means to the entry advantageous state in the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state in steps S114 to S117), and the predetermined result is a display result (for example, a lost pattern) without controlling the entry advantageous state of the variable means. may have been According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the control of the special state even in the case where the control of the entry advantageous state of the variable means is not involved, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the state is shifted to the time saving state when the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide a small winning pattern with time reduction, and when the small winning pattern with time reduction is derived and displayed, it may be configured to shift to a time saving state at the end of the small winning game.

(Means A3) means A1-1, means A1-2 or means A2, determination means for determining whether to display the second predetermined result as the display result of the variable display (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100 078IWS71 part) and high probability state control means (for example, step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a high probability state (for example, variable probability state) that increases the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state and the determining means does not determine whether or not to display the second predetermined result in the high probability state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is Y at step 078IWS70, step 078IWS71). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the state is controlled to a high-probability state that is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means A4) means A1-1, means A1-2 or means A2, determination means for determining whether to display the second predetermined result as the display result of the variable display (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100 078IWS71 part) and high probability state control means (for example, step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a high probability state (for example, variable probability state) that increases the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state and the variable display executing means displays the first predetermined result as the display result of the variable display when it is determined to display the second predetermined result in the high-probability state (for example, modification 3 , the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 078IWS74X when step 078IWS73X is Y). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the state is controlled to a high-probability state that is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A4, the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds, 10 seconds) is the display period of the specific result (for example, 0 .5 seconds) longer than (see, for example, FIGS. 8-32 (A), FIGS. 8-33 (A), (B)), in the period to start controlling the advantageous state, a predetermined area (for example, the game area right area) that can execute promotional notification (for example, right-handed notification) that prompts the operation of shooting the game medium (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS887 in the effect control CPU 120). may have been According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the control of the advantageous state when the specified result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means A6) In any of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A5, the special state control means controls to a special state (for example, a game The control microcomputer 100 executes step 078IWS164), and during the display period of the second predetermined result, a promotion notification (for example, a right side area of the game area) prompting a game medium shooting operation to a predetermined area (for example, a right side area of the game area). Acceleration notification execution means (for example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120) and the start of the display period of the second predetermined result Triggered by the launch operation of the game medium to the predetermined area (For example, a part that executes step 078IWS1125 in the game control microcomputer 100) that emits a light emitter (for example, right-handed LED078IW10) that prompts the player. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation of shooting the game medium to the predetermined area should be performed.

(Means A7) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A5, the special state control means controls to a special state (for example, a game The control microcomputer 100 executes step 078IWS164), and during the display period of the second predetermined result, a promotion notification (for example, a right side area of the game area) prompting a game medium shooting operation to a predetermined area (for example, a right side area of the game area). Acceleration notification execution means (for example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120) and the end of the display period of the second predetermined result Triggered by the firing operation of the game medium to the predetermined area Light emitting body (e.g., right-handed LED078IW10) that prompts light emitting body control means (e.g., in modification 4, step 078IWS166A in game control microcomputer 100) and good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation of shooting the game medium to the predetermined area should be performed.

(Means A8) In any of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A7, the variable display execution means executes variable display of identification information (eg, first special symbol, second special symbol). , special variable display execution means (for example, effect control) that can perform variable display of special identification information (for example, a fourth pattern) in response to variable display of identification information and can display the display result of the variable display of special identification information part for executing step 078IWS701 in the CPU 120 for the special display), and the special variable display execution means provides a display result of the variable display of the special identification information in a manner different from the second predetermined result (for example, two LEDs are lit in blue). state) is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 8-21(B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the progress of the game.

(Means A9) In any one of means A1-1, A1-2 to A8, a special signal capable of specifying that the control is in a special state triggered by the end of the second predetermined result display period. (For example, 2 jackpot signals) can be output signal output means (for example, the part that executes step 078IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally recognize that the special state is controlled.

(Means A10) In any of means A1-1, A1-2 to A9, the special state control means displays the second predetermined result in the non-special state and the second predetermined result in the special state. may be configured to control to a special state until a different number of times of variable display is performed (for example, see FIG. 8-6). According to such a configuration, even when the same second predetermined result is displayed, the degree of advantage differs depending on the game state, so the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means A11) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A10, the variable display execution means, as the second predetermined result, disadvantageous second predetermined result (for example, time saving deviation C) and advantageous It is possible to display two predetermined results (for example, time saving failure A), and the special state control means is variable more times when the advantageous second predetermined result is displayed than when the disadvantageous second predetermined result is displayed. It may be configured to control to a special state (see, eg, FIG. 8-6) until display is performed. According to such a configuration, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the type of the second predetermined result, it is possible to enhance interest in the game.

In addition, the characteristic portion 078IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in (means B1) to (means B13) shown below.

(Means B1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game, and executing a variable display based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, winning of a game ball in a first start winning opening or a second starting winning opening). , a variable display execution means capable of displaying the display result of the variable display (for example, a portion that executes steps S112 and S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a specific result (for example, a big hit pattern) as the display result of the variable display. Advantageous state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on what is displayed; , After being controlled to an advantageous state, special state control that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in a non-special state (e.g., normal state) Means (for example, step 078IWS164, S537 to S539 in the game control microcomputer 100) and background image display means for displaying the effect background image (for example, step 078IWS632, S634, S636, S638 in the effect control CPU 120 ), and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on the fact that a predetermined result different from the specific result (for example, a symbol that saves time) is displayed as a display result of the variable display. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 078IWS164), and the variable display execution means performs shortened variable display (for example, super shortened variation, shortened variation) with a shorter variable display period than normal variable display. It can be executed, and the shortened variable display can be executed at a different rate depending on whether it is controlled to a special state based on the display of a predetermined result or when it is controlled to a special state after an advantageous state ( For example, see FIGS. 8-7 (C) and (D)), the background image display means is controlled to a special state based on the display of a predetermined result, and is controlled to a special state after an advantageous state. A different effect background image is displayed depending on whether the effect is present (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 078IWS634 and S636). According to such a configuration, since the variable display tendency differs depending on the event that triggers the control of the special state, and the performance background image also differs, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

(Means B2) In means B1, when the variable display execution means is controlled to the special state based on the display of the predetermined result, the reduction is at a higher rate than when it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state. It may be configured to be able to perform variable display (for example, see FIGS. 8-38 (C) and (D) in modification 5). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled based on the display of the predetermined result, there is no game value given in the case of the advantageous state control. It is possible to enhance the interest in the game by increasing the variable display efficiency while suppressing gambling.

(Means B3) In means B1, when the variable display execution means is controlled to the special state based on the display of the predetermined result, the reduction is at a lower rate than when it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state. It may be configured to be able to perform variable display (see, for example, FIGS. 8-7 (C) and (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variable display efficiency when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Means B4) In any of means B1 to B3, an entry advantageous state (for example, open state) in which game media (for example, game balls) can enter and an entry disadvantageous state in which entry is difficult or impossible (for example, , closed state) and a variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7), and the advantageous state control means controls the variable means to an entry advantageous state in an advantageous state (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state in steps S114 to S117), and the predetermined result is a display result (for example, a lost pattern) without controlling the entry advantageous state of the variable means. may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the control of the special state even in the case where the control of the entry advantageous state of the variable means is not involved, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Means B5) In any of means B1 to means B4, determination means for determining whether or not to display a predetermined result as a display result of variable display (for example, step 078IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part) and a high probability state control means (for example, step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) that is controllable to a high probability state (for example, probability variable state) that increases the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state) and , and the determination means does not determine whether or not to display a predetermined result in a high probability state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute step 078IWS71 when Y in step 078IWS70) may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the state is controlled to a high-probability state that is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means B6) In any of means B1 to means B4, determination means for determining whether or not to display a predetermined result as a display result of variable display (for example, step 078IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part) and a high probability state control means (for example, step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) that is controllable to a high probability state (for example, probability variable state) that increases the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state) and , and the variable display execution means displays a specific predetermined result that does not trigger the control of the special state as the display result of the variable display when it is determined to display the predetermined result in the high probability state (for example, the modified example 3, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 078IWS74X when step 078IWS73X is Y). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the state is controlled to a high-probability state that is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means B7) In any one of means B1 to B6, the display period of the predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds, 10 seconds) is longer than the display period of the specific result (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, , FIGS. 8-32 (A), FIGS. 8-33 (A), (B)), during the period when the control of the advantageous state is started, the game medium is transferred to a predetermined area (for example, the area to the right of the game area) It may be configured to include promotional notification execution means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS887 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing promotional notification (for example, right-handed notification) that prompts the shooting operation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the control of the advantageous state when the specified result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means B8) In any of means B1 to means B7, the special state control means controls to a special state triggered by the end of the display period of the predetermined result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step 078IWS164 ), and a promotion notification execution means capable of executing a promotion notification (e.g., right-handed notification) that prompts a game medium shooting operation to a predetermined area (e.g., a right area of the game area) during a display period of a predetermined result (For example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120) and the start of the display period of the predetermined result, the light emitting body (for example, right-handed LED 078IW10) that prompts the shooting operation of the game medium to the predetermined area is emitted. (For example, the part that executes step 078IWS1125 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation of shooting the game medium to the predetermined area should be performed.

(Means B9) In any of the means B1 to B7, the special state control means controls the special state with the end of the display period of the predetermined result as a trigger (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step 078IWS164 ), and a promotion notification execution means capable of executing a promotion notification (e.g., right-handed notification) that prompts a game medium shooting operation to a predetermined area (e.g., a right area of the game area) during a display period of a predetermined result (For example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120) and the end of the predetermined result display period triggers the light emitting body (for example, right-handed LED 078IW10) that prompts the shooting operation of the game medium to the predetermined area. (For example, in Modification 4, the part that executes step 078IWS166A in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation of shooting the game medium to the predetermined area should be performed.

(Means B10) In any one of means B1 to B9, the variable display executing means executes variable display of the identification information (for example, first special symbol, second special symbol), and performs variable display of the identification information. Correspondingly, special variable display executing means (for example, step 078IWS701 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute variable display of the special identification information (for example, the fourth pattern) and display the display result of the variable display of the special identification information is executed. and the special variable display execution means displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information in a manner different from the predetermined result (for example, the two LEDs are lit in blue and the display is stopped). (see, for example, FIG. 8-21(B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the progress of the game.

(Means B11) In any one of means B1 to B10, outputting a special signal (for example, 2 jackpot signals) capable of specifying that the special state is being controlled is triggered by the end of the predetermined result display period. Possible signal output means (for example, a portion that executes step 078IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally recognize that the special state is controlled.

(Means B12) In any one of means B1 to B11, the special state control means displays a different number of times when the predetermined result is displayed in the non-special state and when the predetermined result is displayed in the special state. It may be configured to control to a special state (see, eg, FIG. 8-6) until variable display is performed. According to such a configuration, even if the same predetermined result is displayed, the degree of advantage differs depending on the game state, so the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means B13) In any one of means B1 to B12, the variable display execution means displays, as the predetermined result, a predetermined disadvantageous result (for example, time saving loss C) and an advantageous predetermined result (for example, time saving loss A). It is possible, and the special state control means, when a predetermined advantageous result is displayed, controls the special state until the variable display is performed more times than when a predetermined unfavorable result is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-6 See) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the type of the predetermined result, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 25TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 25TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-19. In this embodiment, at the timing when a starting prize is generated, it is possible to execute a special effect (blackout effect at winning, flash effect at winning, which will be described later) that informs that the expectation of a big hit is high in the variable display corresponding to the start winning. , and at a timing different from the timing at which the start-up winning occurred (timing different from the execution timing of the special effect), a predetermined effect (a chance to be described later) that informs that the variation display corresponding to the start-up winning has a high degree of expectation for a big hit Eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) can be executed.

(Luminous body 25TM100)
FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to [Description of Characteristic Part 25TM] of the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to [Description of the characteristic portion 25TM] of the present embodiment includes, for example, as shown in FIG. The light emitter 25TM100 is made to emit light (lighting and/or blinking in this example). In the present embodiment, at the timing when the start winning is generated, a win-time flash effect is performed to notify that the expectation of the big hit of the variable display corresponding to the start winning is high. As the effect mode of the flash effect at the time of winning, there are the effect mode in which the light emitter 25TM100 emits white light and the effect mode in which the light emitter 25TM100 emits red light. Then, when the light emitter 25TM100 emits red light, the likelihood of a big hit is higher than when the light emitter 25TM100 emits white light (see FIG. 9-7(B)).

It should be noted that the rest of the configuration of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to [description of the characteristic portion 25TM] is the same as the configuration of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. .

(random value)
FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-2, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number for variation pattern determination Numerical data indicating each of MR3, random number MR4 for judging the result of normal map display, and random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9B, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

(Variation pattern determination)
In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the variation pattern determination table is used when it is pre-determined that the variation display result will be "missed (with time saving)" or "missing (no time saving)" [missing (with time saving) / For loss (no time saving)] Variation pattern judgment table and [For small hit] fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to make the fluctuation display result "small hit", and the fluctuation display result A [for big win] variation pattern determination table used when it is decided in advance to make a "big win" is prepared in advance.

[For loss (with time saving) / loss (no time saving)] In the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of "non-reach loss", the variation pattern of "normal reach loss", the variation pattern of "super reach A loss", the "super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern can take for each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of “reach B lost” and the fluctuation pattern of “super reach C lost”. there is

The variation pattern of ``non-reach loss'' is a variation pattern in which a combination of ornamental patterns indicating that the result of variation display is ``loss'' because reach is not established after the start of variation display is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the variable display period is 12 seconds when it is determined that the variation pattern is “non-reach failure”, in which the effect that achieves reach is not executed. The fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "non-reach loss" fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern ("normal reach loss", " It is shorter than the variable display period (20 to 70 seconds) of "super reach A lost", "super reach B lost", and "super reach C lost").

[For small hit] In the variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the "special variation small hit" within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. there is

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns (“special variation small win”, “special variation big win”) involving special variation, after the start of the variation display, a special effect image is displayed without using a decorative pattern. As a result, a special variation performance is executed to notify whether a small win or a big win is won, and the final display result is reported after the special variation performance is finished. It is assumed that the variation pattern of the "special variation small win" and the variation pattern of the "special variation big win" have a common performance mode until the final display result is notified.

In this embodiment, the variation display period is 15 seconds when the variation pattern (“special variation small hit”, “special variation big hit”) with special variation is determined. Variation display period when it is determined to be a variation pattern with special variation ("special variation small hit", "special variation big hit"), fluctuation of "non-reach loss" without reach production (reach state is not established) It is longer than the variable display period (12 seconds) when it is determined to be a pattern, and the variable pattern ("normal reach out", "super reach A out", "super reach Shorter than the fluctuation display period (20 to 70 seconds) of B Lost", "Super Reach C Lost", "Normal Reach Big Hit", "Super Reach A Big Hit", "Super Reach B Big Hit", "Super Reach C Big Hit") It's becoming

[For jackpot] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B jackpot", Predetermined random number values within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned as determination values to each variation pattern of the "reach C big hit" variation pattern.

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns involving normal reach ("normal reach lost" and "normal reach big hit"), after the reach state is established, the final display result is displayed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. Fixed stop.

In the present embodiment, the variation display period is 20 seconds when the variation pattern with normal reach (“normal reach lost” or “normal reach jackpot”) is determined. The fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern with normal reach ("normal reach miss" and "normal reach big hit") is judged to be a fluctuation pattern with special fluctuation ("special fluctuation small hit", "special fluctuation big hit") It is longer than the variable display period (12 to 15 seconds) when it is determined that the variable display period is a "non-reach out" variation pattern that does not involve a reach effect (the reach state is not established), and the super Fluctuations in fluctuation patterns involving reach (“super reach A loss”, “super reach A big hit”, “super reach B loss”, “super reach B big hit”, “super reach C loss”, “super reach C big hit”) It is shorter than the display period (50 to 70 seconds).

In the present embodiment, variation patterns accompanied by super reach ("super reach A lost", "super reach A big hit", "super reach B lost", "super reach B big hit", "super reach C lost", "super reach C big hit”), after the ready-to-win state is established, as a super-ready-to-win effect, a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not the player wins the big win by having a battle between the ally character and the enemy character. After the end, the final display result is fixed and stopped.

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns involving super reach A ("super reach A lost" and "super reach A big win"), the super reach effect is achieved by battling an ally character and an enemy A character to win the jackpot. A battle A effect is executed to notify whether or not the player is playing. In addition, in the variation pattern involving super reach B ("super reach B lost" and "super reach B big hit"), whether the big hit is won by a battle between the ally character and the enemy B character as a super reach performance. A battle B effect is executed to notify whether or not. In addition, in the variation pattern accompanying super reach C ("super reach C failure" and "super reach C big hit"), whether a big hit is won by a battle between a friend character and an enemy C character as a super reach performance. A battle C effect is executed to notify whether or not.

In the present embodiment, the variation display period is 50 seconds when a variation pattern with super reach A (“missing super reach A” and “big hit of super reach A”) is determined, and the variation pattern with super reach B is 50 seconds. ("Super reach B lost" and "super reach B big hit"), the fluctuation display period is 60 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach C ("super reach C lost" and "super reach C The variable display period when it is determined as a big hit is 70 seconds.

Variation patterns with super reach ("super reach A lost", "super reach A big hit", "super reach B lost", "super reach B big hit", "super reach C lost", "super reach C big hit") and The fluctuation display period when it is determined is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve super reach ("non-reach loss", "normal reach loss", "normal reach big hit", "special change small hit", "special change big hit"). It is longer than the fluctuation display period (12 to 20 seconds) of any fluctuation pattern in the case of

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the [loss (with time saving) / loss (without time saving)] variation pattern determination table, if the setting value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR3 Of 1 to 997, 1 to 897 are assigned to the "non-reach out" variation pattern, 898 to 977 are assigned to the "normal reach out" variation pattern, and 978 to 987 are "super 988 to 994 are assigned to the variation pattern of "loss of reach A", and 995 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "loss of super reach C". ing.

Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 897 are assigned to the "non-reach out" variation pattern, 898 to 977 are assigned to the "normal reach out" variation pattern, and 978 to 987 are assigned to the " 988 to 994 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach B failure", and 995 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach C failure". It is In this way, when the display result is "missing (with time saving)" or "missing (without time saving)", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in the [small hit] variation pattern determination table, if the set value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the variation pattern of "special variation small hit".

Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "special variation small hit". In this way, when the display result is a "minor hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (C), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, if the set value is "1", 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern of "special variation jackpot", 51 to 100 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", and 101 to 297 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach A jackpot". 298 to 597 are assigned to the "super reach B big hit" variation pattern, and 598 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach C big hit" variation pattern.

Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 50 are assigned to the "special variation jackpot" variation pattern, 51 to 100 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern, and 101 to 297 are assigned to the " 298 to 597 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot", and 598 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach C jackpot". It is In this way, when the display result is "big hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

(layer structure)
FIG. 9-4(A) is a conceptual diagram schematically showing the layer structure of various images in the image display device 5, and FIG. 9-4(B) is a layer structure of various images in the image display device 5. It is an explanatory diagram. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) and (B), the layer structure is composed of four layers: a first layer, a second layer, a third layer, and a fourth layer. there is

As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), the first layer is displayed in the foremost layer, the second layer is displayed in the layer one layer behind the first layer, and the third layer is displayed in the layer one layer behind the first layer. The fourth layer is displayed one layer behind the third layer, ie, the most back layer. Therefore, as the display priority of layers, the display priority of the first layer is the highest, the display priority of the second layer is lower in the order of the third layer, and the display priority of the fourth layer is the lowest. It's becoming That is, the display priority increases in the order of the fourth layer<third layer<second layer<first layer. The information displayed in the predetermined display area of the layer with the higher display priority has higher visibility than the information displayed in the predetermined display area of the layer with the lower display priority (displayed in front of the player). appear to be).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), the first layer displays a small pattern and the value of the number of reserved memories (the value of the first reserved memory number and the value of the second reserved memory number), which will be described later. be. The second layer displays a blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1, second blackout image 25TM300B2) when executing a blackout effect at the time of winning, which will be described later, and a flame effect image 25TM300F when executing a connection zone effect, which will be described later. be done. The third layer displays a suspended display in the suspended display area 25TM011, an active display in the active display area 25TM013, decoration patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a comment image when executing a comment notice effect, which will be described later. Background images (normal background image 25TM200A, special background image 25TM200B), which will be described later, are displayed on the fourth layer.

In the following description, when a predetermined image is arranged on the n-th layer, the predetermined image may be referred to as "predetermined image [n-th layer]". For example, when a decorative design as a predetermined image is arranged on the third layer, the decorative design is referred to as "decorative design [third layer]".

Note that a layer structure with different display priorities may be provided for the specific layer. For example, on the third layer, as described above, decoration patterns, corresponding displays (suspended display, active display), mini-characters and comment images can be arranged. Here, the third layer is composed of the 3-1 layer, the 3-2 layer, and the 3-3 layer. Corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) may be arranged on the 2nd layer, and mini-characters and comment images may be arranged on the 3rd-3rd layer. In this case, it is assumed that the display priority is higher in the order of the 3-3rd layer < the 3-2nd layer < the 3-1st layer.

(Blackout effect when winning a prize)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a blackout effect at the time of winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The prize-winning blackout effect is an advance notice effect that is immediately executed based on the decision to execute the prize-winning blackout effect at the start of winning. When the winning blackout effect is executed, after the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed as a cover image that covers the entire area.

In this embodiment, determination processing at the start winning is performed based on the occurrence of the start winning, and a command at the start winning based on the determination result is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 . Since the effect control CPU 120 executes the blackout effect at the time of winning based on the command at the time of starting winning, the execution timing of the blackout effect at the time of winning is immediately after the occurrence of the start winning (satisfaction of the start condition). This is the timing within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second (100 ms)) after the start winning has occurred (start condition is satisfied). Since the player feels that the winning blackout effect is being executed at the timing when the starting winning occurs (the timing when the starting condition is satisfied), the timing at which the winning blackout effect is executed is the starting winning. can be said to be the timing at which the is generated (the timing at which the starting condition is satisfied).

Specifically, in the winning blackout effect, a blackout image (first blackout image) is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the timing of the starting winning, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. By displaying the out image 25TM300B1 and the second blackout image 25TM300B2), the display result of the variable display corresponding to the start prize (the variable display in which the start condition is established but the start condition is not established) becomes a big hit. Suggest. In this case, the winning blackout effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect.

In this embodiment, when the winning blackout effect is started based on the determination result at the start winning, the winning blackout effect is a variable display corresponding to the starting winning (the target of the winning blackout effect). It is assumed that it is continuously executed until the timing when a certain variable display) is started.

In the present embodiment, the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is a blackout image displayed at the timing when the winning blackout effect is started, and was displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. It is a cover image that reminds us that the effect image (decorative pattern [3rd layer], corresponding display (suspended display, active display) [3rd layer], background image [4th layer], etc.) has suddenly disappeared. .

Also, the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is a blackout image displayed at a timing after the display of the first blackout image, and the effect image displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 ( It is a cover image in a mode that reminds us that the decoration pattern [third layer], the background image [fourth layer], etc.) is continuously disappearing. That is, the first blackout image is an image for notifying that the winning blackout effect has started, and the second blackout image indicates that the winning blackout effect is being continued. This is an image for notification.

In the present embodiment, the blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1, second blackout image 25TM300B2) [second layer] is displayed as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, whereby the background image The visibility of the [fourth layer], decorative patterns [third layer], and corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) [third layer] is reduced to make it difficult to see. That is, by executing the blackout effect at the time of winning, the background image [fourth layer] continues to be difficult to see, the decorative pattern [third layer] continues to be difficult to see, and the corresponding display (hold display, Active display) [3rd layer] visibility difficulty state is also continued.

Here, the background image [4th layer], decorative pattern [3rd layer], corresponding display (suspended display, active display) [3rd layer] continue to be in an invisible state due to the blackout effect at the time of winning. , the value of the reserved storage number [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer], which will be described later, remain visible. That is, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] displayed as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer] variably displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the reserved display area 25TM011. While the visibility of both the normal mode pending display 25TM001 [third layer] and the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] displayed in the active display area 25TM013 is reduced, the first pending storage number display "2" [first layer] displayed in the area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and fluctuations in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r The visibility of the displayed small patterns [first layer] has not deteriorated (see FIG. 9-5).

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variable pattern designation command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command. That is, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the special design (in parallel), and the small design is varied in correspondence with the variable display of the special design (in parallel). Display is running.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the value of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second reserved memory number display area of the image display device 5. 25TM025 displays the value of the second reserved storage number.

In addition, in the present embodiment, at the start of the winning blackout effect (that is, at the timing when the first blackout image is displayed), a voice ( After that, a blackout sound effect effect is executed to reproduce and output the sound effect), and then a mute effect is executed to not reproduce and output the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9, which is a production device different from the light emitter 25TM100, is turned off during the period in which the winning blackout production is being executed.

(connection zone production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the connection zone effect after the end of the blackout effect at the time of winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The connection zone effect is composed of a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect.

The first effect in the connection zone effect is the timing at which the winning blackout effect ends (that is, the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the start winning (variable display that is the target of the winning blackout effect) starts). , the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is erased from the image display device 5, and the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the first effect in the connection zone effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, volcanic smoke, and the characters "Battle Zone" as the background image. Control is being executed to place the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] on the fourth layer. Since the control for arranging the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] including the flame effect image 25TM300F on the second layer is also executed and displayed, the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] is difficult to see.

Further, the second effect in the connection zone effect means that the flame effect image 25TM300F is erased from the image display device 5 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the first effect, and a predetermined timing (this A special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] representing a volcanic landscape including a night sky, a mountain, volcanic smoke, and the characters "Battle Zone" is used as a decorative design background image for the period until the timing of developing to super reach in the example). is displayed in a visibly visible way. That is, when the second effect in the connection zone effect is executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer] is executed in a state where the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] is visible. .

In this embodiment, when the second effect in the connection zone effect is executed, a special background image representing a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, volcanic smoke, and the characters "Battle Zone" is used as the background image of the decoration pattern. 25TM200B [fourth layer] is displayed. At this time, since the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer], which is the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, is erased by the end of the first effect, the special background image 25TM200B [second layer] is erased. 4 layer] is visible.

In this embodiment, the connection zone effect is a effect that is always executed when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, and develops into a super ready-to-win with high expectations for a big hit (battle B effect or battle C effect). Either one of them will be executed) is a production that is determined. That is, determining whether or not to execute the winning blackout effect corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the connection zone effect.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection zone effect is always executed after the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed. A pattern in which the connection zone effect is executed and a pattern in which the connection zone effect is not executed after the winning blackout effect is executed may be provided. And if the effect is executed according to the pattern in which the connection zone effect is executed after the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the effect is executed according to the pattern in which the connection zone effect is not executed after the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed. The degree of expectation for a big win may be higher (the ratio of execution of either the battle B effect or the battle C effect may be increased) than in the case of being executed.

Specifically, for the connection zone effect accompanying the blackout effect at the time of winning, the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (variable display that is the target of the connection zone effect accompanying the blackout effect at the time of winning) started after the start winning. By displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the timing, the changing display indicating the display result of the variable display being executed (the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied) is displayed. It is executed as a preview effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the background image [fourth layer] and the decorative pattern [ 3rd layer] and corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) [3rd layer] are reduced in visibility to make them difficult to see. That is, by executing the first effect in the connection zone effect after the blackout effect at the time of winning, the background image [fourth layer] continues to be difficult to see, and the decorative pattern [third layer] is also difficult to see. The display is continued, and the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) [third layer] is also continued in the difficult-to-recognize state.

Here, the background image [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [3rd layer] continue by the connection zone effect after the blackout effect at the time of winning Although it becomes difficult to see, the value of the reserved memory number [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer] remain visible. That is, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] displayed as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer] variably displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the reserved display area 25TM011. While the visibility of both the normal mode pending display 25TM001 [third layer] and the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] displayed in the active display area 25TM013 is reduced, the first pending storage number display "0" [first layer] displayed in the area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and fluctuations in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r The visibility of the displayed small patterns [first layer] is not lowered.

(Example of blackout effect at the time of winning and connection zone effect)
FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image relating to the winning blackout effect and the connection zone effect displayed on the image display device 5. FIG. FIGS. 9-5(1) to 9-5(6) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the winning blackout effect is executed as the preview effect, and FIG. -5 (7) and (8) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the connection zone effect is executed as the notice effect during fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decoration in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The symbol [third layer] is being variably displayed, and the small symbol [first layer] is being variably displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. The effect control CPU 120 displays a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] representing a sunny landscape including the sky and mountains as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 25TM013, and the first reserved storage number is 1. Based on this, it is assumed that one suspension display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode is displayed in the suspension display area 25TM011 of the image display device 5 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer] is being executed, a new start It is assumed that a prize has been won and the number of first reserved memories is two. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the number of first reserved memories has increased. The effect control CPU 120 executes a blackout effect at the time of winning based on the command at the time of starting winning (determination result at the time of starting winning), and displays the first blackout image as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 in the third layer, and the suspended display 25TM001 in the normal mode in the suspended display area 25TM011. While one [third layer] is continuously arranged, based on the reception of the command indicating that the number of first reserved storage has increased, the reservation display 25TM001 in the normal mode is displayed in the first reservation display area 25TM0011. are newly placed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the 4th layer, the 3rd layer, and the 2nd layer. By displaying the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display , active display) The visibility of the [third layer] is lowered and it is difficult to see.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5 to display "2" [first layer]. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer. Even if the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed as a 1 layer] and the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] are not degraded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5(3), the effect control CPU 120 changes the image of the second layer to the first blackout effect after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the winning blackout effect. The out image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is changed to the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]. Then, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, and the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is generated. 2 blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (“243” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 . In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 in the third layer, and the suspended display 25TM001 [in the normal mode in the suspended display area 25TM011]. 3rd layer] are arranged continuously. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] on the fourth layer as the background image of the decorative pattern.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the 4th layer, the 3rd layer, and the 2nd layer. By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display , active display) The visibility of the [third layer] is lowered and it is difficult to see.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5 to display "2" [first layer]. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . Also, the effect control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (“243” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In other words, the combination of the small symbols whose display result is "loss" is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer. Even if the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed as a 1 layer] and the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] are not degraded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning blackout effect, and the image display device 5 continues to display the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as a cover image covering the entire display screen.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Let In addition, in the third layer, the effect control CPU 120 arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] of the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1, and the reserved display. The normal mode pending display 25TM001 displayed in the area 25TM011 is shifted one by one toward the active display area 25TM013. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the 4th layer, the 3rd layer, and the 2nd layer. By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display , active display) The visibility of the [third layer] is lowered and it is difficult to see.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is displayed. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer. Even if the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed as a 1 layer] and the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] are not degraded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning blackout effect, and the image display device 5 continues to display the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as a cover image covering the entire display screen.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (“134” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 . In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 in the third layer, and the suspended display 25TM001 [in the normal mode in the suspended display area 25TM011]. 3rd layer] is continuously arranged. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the 4th layer, the 3rd layer, and the 2nd layer. By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display , active display) The visibility of the [third layer] is lowered and it is difficult to see.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . Also, the effect control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (“134” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In other words, the combination of the small symbols whose display result is "loss" is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer. Even if the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed as a 1 layer] and the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] are not degraded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the win-time blackout effect and executes the connection zone effect. do. Specifically, the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is erased, and the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] including the characters “Battle ZONE” is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 . layer].

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Let In addition, the effect control CPU 120 arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] of the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 as the first reserved storage number becomes 0 in the third layer, and the reserved display. The normal mode pending display 25TM001 displayed in the area 25TM011 is erased. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 represents a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, volcanic smoke, and the characters "Battle Zone" from the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] for the background image arranged on the fourth layer. It is changed to a special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer].

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the 4th layer, the 3rd layer, and the 2nd layer. By displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] as the covering image, the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display) [ The visibility of the third layer] is lowered and the visibility is difficult.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is displayed. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer is higher in the order of the second layer and the first layer. Even if the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed as ], and the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] are not degraded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (7), at the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the connection zone effect, and the image display device 5 to erase the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer].

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is performing variable display of decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 in the third layer. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] as the background image of the decoration pattern on the fourth layer.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the second layer, which has a higher display priority than the fourth layer and the third layer, does not display any cover image, so that the special background image is not displayed. The visibility of the background image 25TM200B [fourth layer], the decoration pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display) [third layer] is improved and is visible.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display "0" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, Since the second reserved memory count is 0, the second reserved memory count display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 continues to display "0" [first layer].

At this time, even if the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is erased as shown in FIG. The visibility of "0" [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer] of the number display area 25TM025 has not deteriorated.

(Flash effect when winning a prize)
As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The win-time flash effect is an advance notice effect in which the luminous body 25TM100 emits light based on the determination to execute the win-time flash effect at the start of winning.

In this embodiment, determination processing at the start winning is performed based on the occurrence of the start winning, and a command at the start winning based on the determination result is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 . Since the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning flash effect based on the start winning command, the execution timing of the winning flash effect is immediately after the start winning occurs (the start condition is met). , within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second (100 ms)) after the start winning has occurred (the start condition is satisfied). Since the player feels that the winning flash effect is being executed at the timing when the starting prize is generated (the timing when the starting condition is satisfied), the timing when the winning flash effect is executed is the timing when the starting prize is generated. It can also be said that it is the timing when the start condition is met (timing when the starting condition is satisfied).

Specifically, the flash effect at the time of winning is based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, and the light emitting body 25TM100 emits light at the timing of the starting winning. However, the display result of variable display where the start condition is not satisfied may suggest that a big hit will be achieved. The winning flash effect in this case is executed as a look-ahead foretelling effect.

In addition, the winning flash effect is executed by causing the light emitter 25TM100 to emit light at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the starting winning (variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect) is started after the start winning. There is a case where it is executed as a change-in-progress notice effect that suggests the display result of the change display (change display in which the start condition is satisfied). In this case, the win-time flash effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation.

In this embodiment, when the winning flash effect is started based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the flash effect at winning will be a variable display corresponding to the starting winning (variable display that is the target of the flash effect at winning). ) (in this example, the timing at which reach is established).

In addition, in the present embodiment, at the start of the winning flash effect, a flash sound effect effect is executed by using the speakers 8L and 8R to reproduce and output a sound effect (such as a flash effect sound) for notifying the execution of the winning flash effect. .

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of effect modes in which the luminous body 25TM100, which is a light emitting device, emits light of different colors as the effect mode of the winning flash effect. When it is determined to execute the flash effect at the time of winning in the initial winning effect determination process, the effect mode of the flash effect at the time of winning is either "white light emitting mode" or "red light emitting mode". is determined by

The effect control CPU 120 blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in white at the timing of the start winning in the winning flash effect of the white light emission mode. Then, from the timing of the starting prize to the timing of super reach development in the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning), control is executed to continuously blink the light emitting body 25TM100 in white. do. In addition, in the winning flash effect of the white light emission mode, when the winning flash effect is started, the light effect sound A is reproduced once as a sound effect for notifying the execution of the winning flash effect using the speakers 8L and 8R. shall be

The effect control CPU 120 blinks the light emitting body 25TM100 in red at the timing of the start winning in the winning flash effect of the red light emitting mode. Then, from the timing of the starting prize to the timing of super reach development in the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning), control is executed to continuously blink the light emitting body 25TM100 in red. do. In addition, in the flash effect at the time of winning in the red light emission mode, when the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the light effect sound B is reproduced once as a sound effect notifying the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning using the speakers 8L and 8R. shall be

Thus, the luminous body 25TM100 emits different colors (white in the white luminescence mode and red in the red luminescence mode) in the winning flash effect in the white luminous mode and the winning flash effect in the red luminous mode. In this embodiment, the blinking interval of the light emitter 25TM100 (interval of ON/OFF of the light emission of the light emitter 25TM100) is common between the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode and the winning flash effect in the red light emitting mode. However, it is not limited to such a form, and the blinking interval of the light emitting body 25TM100 may be different between the winning flash effect of the white light emitting mode and the winning flash effect of the red light emitting mode. The blinking interval (light emission cycle) may be shorter (shorter light emission period) in the win-win flash effect in the red light emission mode than in the effect.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the light-emitting effect sound is output only once at the timing when the winning flash effect is started (timing of the start winning). Not only at the timing when the flash performance is started, but also at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the variable display including the variable display of the target is started) in the period when the flash performance at the time of winning is executed, the light emitting effect sound is output. You may do so.

(Chance eye production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the chance effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The chance display is a combination of (a) even-numbered symbols or (b) odd-numbered symbols as the combination of decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbols are enlarged and displayed. This is a notice effect of stopping and displaying the decorative pattern in the display mode.

In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the chance effect at the time of starting winning in a state where the number of pending memories is 1 or more, From the variable display to (ii) the variable display immediately before the variable display that is the target of the notice of the chance effect, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in each of the variable displays of (i) and (ii) is selected. , a combination of even patterns (for example, "246", "468", etc.), or a combination of odd patterns (for example, "135", "357", etc.), a variable display corresponding to the start winning ( A variable display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied may suggest a big hit. The chance eye effect in this case is executed as a look-ahead foretelling effect.

Further, when it is decided to execute the chance game effect at the time of starting winning while the number of pending memories is 0, (iii) the variable display for which the chance game effect is announced is displayed as described above. After temporarily stopping the combination of even-numbered symbols or odd-numbered symbols, the variable display being executed (the start condition is In some cases, the display result of the established variable display) may suggest a big hit. The chance eye effect in this case is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of presentation modes in which combinations of decoration symbols to be stopped (including temporary stop) are different as the presentation mode of the chance eye presentation. When it is determined to execute the chance game effect in the starting prize winning effect determination process, the effect mode of the chance game effect is determined to be one of the "even mode" and the "odd mode". (See FIG. 9-9(C)).

In addition, in the variable display after the variable display in which the even-numbered chance effect is executed, the odd-numbered chance effect may be executed. In this case, the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher than when the odd-numbered chance performance is executed without executing the even-numbered chance performance.

(Change production)
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The change effect is a special mode (in this example, , white triangle display), blue mode (in this example, blue circle display), or red mode (in this example, red circle display).

Specifically, among the change effects, the hold change effect that displays the display mode of 25TM001 of the hold display in a display mode different from the normal mode (any one of the special mode, the blue mode, and the red mode), It is a look-ahead forewarning effect that suggests the display result of a variable display that has not been executed (a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied). In addition, among the change effects, an active change effect is being executed in which the display mode of the active display 25TM003 is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (any one of the special mode, the blue mode, and the red mode). It is a change-in-progress notice effect that suggests the display result of the change display (change display in which the start condition is satisfied). The timing of executing the change effect and the change pattern of the pending display will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-10 to 9-12.

(Comment notice performance)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the comment announcement effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The comment notice effect is a display result of a variable display corresponding to the start winning (a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) along with the mini character in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. This is an effect in which a suggestive comment image is displayed.

Specifically, when it is decided to execute the comment notice effect at the time of the start winning, (i) from the variable display following the change display executed at the time of the start win, (ii) the comment notice effect A comment image is displayed together with a mini-character at the start of each of (i) to (ii) up to the variable display immediately preceding the variable display to be announced. With such a presentation mode, it is suggested that the display result of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (the variable display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied) will be a big win. This comment notice effect is executed as a look-ahead notice effect.

In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of effect modes in which characters displayed in the comment image are different as the effect mode of the comment preview effect. In the starting prize-winning effect determination process, the effect mode of the comment notice effect is determined to be one of the "first mode" and the "second mode" (see FIGS. 9-10). In the comment notice effect of the first mode, the mini character and the first comment image (the comment image showing the characters "Next chance?") are displayed, and in the comment notice effect of the second mode, the mini character and the second A comment image (a comment image showing the characters "Next, expect!") is displayed.

In this comment preview effect, when the comment image is displayed, character voice sounds corresponding to the characters shown in the comment image may be reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the comment notice effect of the first mode is executed, a mini-character and a first comment image (a comment image showing the characters "Next chance?") are displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the character voice sound "Next chance?"

<First Embodiment>
[Production determination process at the time of start winning]
FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7 are a first embodiment of a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the time of starting winning. Effect control CPU120, in the pre-reading notice setting processing (step S161) of the effect control process processing shown in FIG. Run.

In the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a set of start winning commands (for example, symbol designation command , variable category command, and first reserved storage count addition command) is newly received (step S25TM1000).

The symbol designation command indicates whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit, or whether it will be a loss (with time reduction) among the judgment results at the time of winning, and if it is judged to be a big hit It is an effect control command indicating the determination result of the type of the big hit, and the determination result of the time saving type when it is determined to be lost (with time saving).

CPU103, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, based on the random number for judging the big hit extracted at the time of starting winning, determines whether it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit, Attached), and as shown in FIGS. 8-4 and 8-5, based on the type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, loss (time saving Attached) determines the type of time saving in the case of, and outputs a symbol designation command that designates the determination result. Also, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether normal reach or super reach is achieved based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command designating the determination result. Further, the first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variation category command, and first reserved memory number addition designation command) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. judge. If a new set of starting winning commands has not been received (NO in step S25TM1000), the process ends.

If one set of start-up winning commands is newly received (YES in step S25TM1000), effect control CPU 120 sets any of a prefetch prohibition flag, a specific flag, or a predetermined flag, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S25TM1010). If any of the read-ahead prohibition flag, specific flag, and predetermined flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), the process ends. That is, if the read-ahead prohibition flag is set (YES at step S25TM1010), the processing from step S25TM1020 onwards is skipped, and if the specific flag is set (YES at step S25TM1010), the processing from step S25TM1020 onwards is skipped. If the process is skipped and the predetermined flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), the process after step S25TM1020 is skipped.

When none of the look-ahead prohibition flag, the specific flag, and the predetermined flag is set (NO in step S25TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 displays the reserved storage information corresponding to the starting winning before the starting winning. It is determined whether all the results (judgment results at the time of starting prize winning) are "missing (no time saving)" and the display result of the variable display being executed is "missing (no time saving)" (step S25TM1020).

Any of the display results of the pending memory information corresponding to the start-up prize before the start-up prize (judgment result at the start-up prize) is not "missing (no time reduction)", or the display result of the variable display during execution is not "lost (no time saving)" (NO in step S25TM1020), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1230.

The display results of the pending memory information corresponding to the starting prize before the starting prize (judgment result at the time of the starting prize) are all "missing (no time reduction)", and the display result of the variable display during execution is In the case of "losing (no time reduction)" (YES in step S25TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the timing at which the start winning is generated is the pattern stop period or the pattern fixed period in the variable display being executed. , or any period (step S25TM1030).

(Design suspension period, design confirmation period)
In this embodiment, as shown in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 8-24, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS804). The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the process timer set value, a variable time is set in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. 8-25 and 8-26, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 078IWS841) and sets the variable time timer to 1 Subtract (step S078IWS842).

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 stops displaying the combination of decorative patterns based on the display control execution data and notifies the display result from the timing to the timing to receive the pattern confirmation designation command and shift to the pattern confirmation period. The period of is the symbol stop period. In the symbol stop period, the decoration symbol is stopped (swinging is stopped) to notify the display result of the variation and to notify that the variation display is not finished yet. Further, in the present embodiment, a period including the symbol stop period and the symbol fixed period is referred to as a specific period.

FIG. 9-8 is a timing chart for explaining the symbol stop period and the symbol fixed period in each variation pattern when the display result is "loss (no time saving)". Fig. 9-8 (A) shows the pattern stop period and the pattern determination when the fluctuation pattern is either "non-reach loss" or "normal reach loss" when the display result is "loss (no time saving)" It is a timing chart for explaining a period. In addition, FIG. 9-8 (B) shows that when the display result is "missing (no time saving)", the variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach ("super reach A missing", "super reach B missing", or "Super Reach C Lost") is a timing chart for explaining the symbol stop period and the symbol fixed period.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), when the display result is "missing (no time saving)", when the fluctuation pattern is either "non-reach missing" or "normal reach missing", for production control The CPU 120 decreases the value of the variable time timer by 1 as the variable display progresses after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and decorates at the timing (timing of T1A) 0.5 seconds before the variable time timer times out. Stop displaying the pattern. The timing of this T1A is the start timing of the symbol stop period. Then, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable time timer times out and receives the symbol confirmation designation command, determines and stops the decoration symbol (timing of T2A). The timing of this T2A is the end timing of the symbol stop period and the start timing of the symbol fixed period. Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the design confirmation period at the timing (timing of T3A) 0.5 seconds after receiving the design confirmation designation command (after the variable time timer times out). Therefore, when the display result is "off (no time saving)", when the fluctuation pattern is either "non-reach out" or "normal reach out", the period from the timing of T1A to the timing of T3A is a specific period (0.5+0.5=1 second).

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), when the display result is "missing (no time saving)", the variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach ("super reach A lost", "super reach B lost" , or "super reach C lost"), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern and then decreases the value of the variable time timer by 1 as the variable display progresses. The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing (timing of T1B) two seconds before the time timer times out. The timing of this T1B is the start timing of the symbol stop period. Then, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable time timer times out and receives the symbol confirmation designation command, determines and stops the decoration symbol (timing of T2B). The timing of this T2B is the end timing of the symbol stop period and the start timing of the symbol fixing period. Then, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the design confirmation period at the timing (timing of T3B) 0.5 seconds after receiving the design confirmation designation command (after the variable time timer times out). Therefore, when the display result is "missing (no time saving)", the variation pattern with super reach ("super reach A lost", "super reach B lost", or "super reach C lost") When it becomes either, the period from the timing of T1B to the timing of T3B is set as a specific period (2+0.5=2.5 seconds).

In this way, when the variation pattern is either "non-reach loss" or "normal reach loss", the symbol stop period is 0.5 seconds (period from T1A to T2A). On the other hand, when the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns accompanied by super reach (“super reach A lost”, “super reach B lost”, or “super reach C lost”), the symbol stop period is 2 seconds (T1B to T2B). Therefore, the symbol stop period is a different period depending on the variation pattern.

Further, when the variation pattern is either "non-reach loss" or "normal reach loss", the symbol fixing period is 0.5 seconds (period from T2A to T3A). In addition, when the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns with super reach (“super reach A lost”, “super reach B lost”, or “super reach C lost”), the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds ( period from T2B to T3B). Therefore, the pattern fixing period is a fixed period regardless of the variation pattern.

If the timing at which the starting prize is generated is the symbol stop period or the symbol fixed period in the variable display being executed (that is, if it is the specific period) (YES in step S25TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S25TM1090. proceed to

If the timing at which the start winning is generated is neither the pattern stop period in the variable display being executed nor the pattern fixed period (that is, if it is not the specific period) (NO in step S25TM1030), the effect control The CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern determined at the time of starting winning, that is, the variation pattern specified by the variation category command is a variation pattern with either super reach B or super reach C (“super reach B lost”, “super reach B jackpot”, “super reach C lose”, or “super reach C jackpot”) is determined (step S25TM1040).

Not a variation pattern with either Super Reach B or Super Reach C (Either the variation pattern is "Super Reach B Miss", "Super Reach B Big Hit", "Super Reach C Miss" or "Super Reach C Big Hit" No) (NO in step S25TM1040), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1090.

A variation pattern that accompanies either Super Reach B or Super Reach C. ), (YES in step S25TM1040), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning blackout effect is to be executed. A) Refer to).

(Decision table for execution/non-execution of blackout effect at the time of winning)
FIG. 9-9(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the winning blackout effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(A), the judgment values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the winning blackout effect differs according to the display result.

The effect control CPU 120 is 99 when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss (no time saving)" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss (no time saving)"). It is decided not to execute the blackout performance at the time of winning at a rate of 1%, and it is determined to execute the blackout performance at the time of winning at a rate of 1%.

The effect control CPU 120 is 100 when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss (with time reduction)" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss (with time reduction)"). %, it is decided not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning.

When the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the effect control CPU 120 blacks out at the time of winning at a rate of 40%. It is decided not to execute the performance, and it is decided to execute the blackout performance at the time of winning at a rate of 60%.

When the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the effect control CPU 120 has a ratio of 100% at the time of winning It decides not to execute the blackout rendition.

In this way, if the determination result at the time of the start winning is either "loss (with time reduction)" or "small hit" (that is, the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss (with time reduction)" or "small 100% of the time, it is decided not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning. On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (no time saving)" or "big hit" (that is, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)" or "big hit" In any case), it is decided to execute the winning blackout effect at a rate of 1 to 60%. Therefore, when the winning blackout effect is executed, it is determined that the display result will be "loss (no time reduction)" or "big win".

In addition, even when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either ``losing (with short working hours)'' or ``minor win'', the judgment value may be allocated so that the blackout performance at the time of winning can be executed. For example, if the judgment result at the start-up prize is either "loss (with time reduction)" or "small hit", the percentage is higher than the case where the judgment result at the start-up prize is "loss (no time reduction)" The blackout effect at the time of winning may be executed at a lower rate than the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss (no time reduction)". good too. In addition, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "loss (with time reduction)" or "small hit", the black The out performance may be executed, and the blackout performance at the time of winning may be executed at a higher rate than when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit". For example, if the judgment result at the start-up prize is either "loss (with time reduction)" or "small hit", the percentage is higher than the case where the judgment result at the start-up prize is "loss (no time reduction)" , and the blackout effect at the time of winning may be executed at a lower rate than in the case where the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit".

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when the winning blackout effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the winning blackout effect is not executed.

After completing the process of step S25TM1050, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the winning blackout effect (step S25TM1060). If it is determined not to execute the winning blackout effect (NO in step S25TM1060), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1090.

When it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060), effect control CPU 120 sets a first look-ahead counter (step S25TM1070) and sets a specific flag described later. (step S25TM1080), and the process proceeds to step S25TM1090.

In the first look-ahead counter, a value corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the start winning (the value specified by the first reserved memory number designation command) is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol is set. The value of the first look-ahead counter is decremented by one each time it is executed (every time the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received). That is, every time the pending display 25TM001 corresponding to the pending memory that is the object of determination at the time of starting winning is shifted, the value of the first look-ahead counter is subtracted. Then, when the value of the first look-ahead counter becomes 0, the target variable display is executed. A second prefetch counter, a third prefetch counter, and a fourth prefetch counter, which will be described later, are decremented in the same manner as the first prefetch counter.

During the period in which the specific flag is set, even if a new start-up win occurs, the above-described step S25TM1010 determines YES, so that the win corresponding to the new start-up win (new first reserved memory) is determined. When the blackout effect is not executed. The specific flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) targeted for the winning blackout effect is completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern determined at the time of starting winning, that is, the variation pattern specified by the variation category command is "non-reach out" (step S25TM1090). If the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (YES in step S25TM1090), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1140.

If the variation pattern is not "non-reach out" (NO in step S25TM1090), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the flash effect and effect mode when winning a prize. (step S25TM1100).

(Whether or not execution of flash effect at the time of winning and effect mode determination table)
FIG. 9-9(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution of the winning flash effect and the effect mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B), the determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the winning flash effect differs according to the display result.

The effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss (no time reduction)" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss (no time reduction)"), 90 8% decides not to execute the winning flash effect, 8% decides to execute the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, and 2% decides to execute the red light emitting flash effect in the winning mode. decide to carry out

The effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss (with time reduction)" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss (with time reduction)"), 90 %, it is decided not to execute the flash performance at the time of winning, and at the rate of 10%, it is decided to execute the flash performance at the time of winning in the white light emission mode.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the effect control CPU 120 performs a flash effect at the time of winning at a rate of 30%. is decided not to be executed, 20% of the execution of the winning flash performance of the white light emission mode is determined, and 50% of the execution of the red light emission mode winning flash performance is determined.

When the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the effect control CPU 120 has a ratio of 100% at the time of winning It is decided not to execute the flash effect.

In this way, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the flash effect at the time of winning at a rate of 100% has decided not to implement On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (without time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit" (that is, the decision result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing ( In the case of any one of "no time reduction", "lost (with time reduction)", or "big hit"), it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning at a rate of 10 to 70%. Therefore, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the display result is a display result other than "small hit" ("loss (no time reduction)", "loss (with time reduction)", or "big hit" display) result).

It should be noted that even when the determination result at the time of start-up winning is "small hit", the determination value may be allocated so that the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9(B), when the win-time flash effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the win-time flash effect is not executed. Further, when the winning flash effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher in the order of winning flash effect in white light emission mode<win flash effect in red light emitting mode.

After completing the processing of step S25TM1100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the winning flash effect (step S25TM1110). If it is determined not to execute the winning flash effect (NO in step S25TM1110), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1140.

If it is decided to execute the winning flash effect (YES in step S25TM1110), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S25TM1120), and sets a predetermined flag described later (step S25TM1120). S25TM1130), and the process proceeds to step S25TM1140.

During the period in which the predetermined flag is set, even if a new start-up win occurs, the above-described step S25TM1010 determines YES, so that the win corresponding to the new start-up win (new first reserved memory) is determined. Time flash effects are not executed. The predetermined flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) targeted for the winning flash effect is completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines that all of the variation patterns of the pending storage information corresponding to the starting winning before the starting winning are “non-reach out”, and the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not "reach is out of reach" (step S25TM1140). If any of the variation patterns of the pending storage information corresponding to the start winning prior to the start winning is not "non-reach out", or if the variation pattern of the variable display during execution is not "non-reach out" (NO in step S25TM1140), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1230.

When all the variation patterns of the pending storage information corresponding to the start winning before the start winning are "non-reach out" and the variation pattern of the variable display during execution is "non-reach out" (YES in step S25TM1140), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye effect and the effect mode based on the table for determining whether or not to execute the chance eye effect and the effect mode (step S25TM1150).

(Execution/non-execution of chance effect and effect mode determination table)
FIG. 9-9(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution of the chance eye effect and the effect mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(C), the determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the chance effect is different according to the display result.

The effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss (no time reduction)" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss (no time reduction)"), 95 1% decides not to execute the chance game effect, 4% decides to execute the even game game game effect, and 1% decides to execute the odd game game game game effect. decide.

The effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss (with time reduction)" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss (with time reduction)"), 92 100% decides not to execute the chance game presentation, 6% decides to execute the even-number mode chance game production, and 2% decides to execute the even-number mode chance game production. decide.

The effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), gives a chance eye effect at a rate of 85%. It decides not to execute it, decides to execute the even-number mode chance game presentation at a rate of 8%, and decides to execute the odd-number mode chance game presentation at a rate of 7%.

The effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the chance eye at a rate of 100%. Decide not to perform the rendition.

In this way, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "minor hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the pattern designation command is "minor hit"), 100% chance production is performed. Decided not to do it. On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (without time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit" (that is, the decision result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing ( It is decided to execute the chance effect at a rate of 5 to 15% in the case of any of "no time saving)", "loss (with time saving)", or "big hit"). Therefore, when the chance eye production is executed, the display result is a display result other than "small hit" ("loss (without time reduction)", "loss (with time reduction)", or "big hit" display result ).

It should be noted that even when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit", the determination value may be allocated so that the chance effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9(C), when the chance game effect is executed, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than when the chance game effect is not executed. Further, when the chance game effect is executed, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in the order of chance game effect in the even mode<chance game effect in the odd mode.

After completing the process of step S25TM1150, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the chance effect (step S25TM1160). If it is determined not to execute the chance effect (NO in step S25TM1160), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1185.

If it is decided to execute the chance effect (YES in step S25TM1110), the effect control CPU 120 sets the third look-ahead counter (step S25TM1170) and sets a look-ahead prohibition flag (step S25TM1170). S25TM1180), and the process proceeds to step S25TM1185.

During the period in which the read-ahead prohibition flag is set, even if a new start-up win occurs, the above-mentioned step S25TM1010 determines YES, thereby corresponding to the new start-up win (new first reserved memory). The chance presentation is not executed. The look-ahead prohibition flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) targeted for the chance effect is completed.

In addition, the prefetch prohibition flag is also set when it is decided to execute the comment notice effect (YES in step S25TM1200) or when it is decided to execute the change effect (YES in step S25TM1240). be. As in the case where the execution of the chance effect is determined for this look-ahead prohibition flag as well, during the period in which the look-ahead prohibition flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, YES is given in step S25TM1010. As a result of the determination, the comment announcement effect and change effect corresponding to the new start winning (new first reserved memory) are not executed. The read-ahead prohibition flag is cleared when the change display (so-called target change) targeted for the comment notice effect or the change effect ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the number of first reserved memories after updating based on the occurrence of the start winning (the number of first reserved memories including the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning) is 2 or more. is determined (step S25TM1185). When the number of first reserved memories after updating based on the occurrence of the start winning (the number of first reserved memories including the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning) is less than 2 (NO in step S25TM1185), the effect Control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1230.

When the number of first reserved memories after updating based on the occurrence of the start winning (the number of first reserved memories including the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning) is 2 or more (YES in step S25TM1185), the effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the comment notice effect and the mode of effect based on the table (see FIGS. 9-10) for determining whether or not the comment notice effect is to be executed and the mode of effect (step S25TM1190). That is, when the number of first reserved memories (the number of first reserved memories including the reserved memory corresponding to the starting prize) after updating based on the occurrence of the starting prize is 2 or more, the comment notice effect is executed. The presence/absence is determined, but if it is 0 or 1, it is not determined whether or not the comment notice effect is executed (the comment notice effect cannot be executed).

Whether or not the comment notice effect is to be executed is determined (the process of step S25TM1190 is executed) without being limited to such a form. number of memories) may be 3 or more, or may be 4 or more.

(Execution/non-execution of comment notice effect and effect mode determination table)
9-10 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of execution/non-execution of comment notice effect and effect mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10, the judgment values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the comment announcement effect differs according to the display result.

The effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss (no time saving)" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss (no time saving)"), 80 18% decides not to execute the comment notice effect, 18% decides to execute the first mode comment notice effect, and 2% decides to execute the second mode comment notice effect. to decide.

The effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss (with time reduction)" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss (with time reduction)"), 75 20% decides not to execute the comment notice effect, 20% decides to execute the first mode comment notice effect, and 5% decides to execute the second mode comment notice effect. to decide.

Effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the comment notice effect at a rate of 60%. It decides not to execute it, decides to execute the first mode comment notice effect at a rate of 10%, and decides to execute the comment notice effect of the second mode at a rate of 30%.

Effect control CPU 120, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), comment notice at a rate of 100% Decide not to perform the rendition.

In this way, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), the comment notice effect is performed at a rate of 100%. Decided not to do it. On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (without time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit" (that is, the decision result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing ( It is determined that the comment notice effect is executed at a rate of 20 to 40% in the case of any of the following cases: (no time saving), "losing (with time saving)", or "big hit"). Therefore, at the time the comment notice effect is executed, the display result is a display result other than "small hit" ("miss (without time saving)", "miss (with time saving)", or "big hit" display result ).

It should be noted that even when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "small win", the judgment value may be allocated so that the comment notice effect can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-10, when the comment notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher than when the comment notice effect is not executed. Further, when the comment advance notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win increases in the order of the comment advance notice effect of the first mode<the comment notice effect of the second mode.

After completing the process of step S25TM1190, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the comment announcement effect (step S25TM1200). If it is decided not to execute the comment announcement effect (NO in step S25TM1200), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1230.

When it is decided to execute the comment notice effect (YES in step S25TM1200), effect control CPU 120 sets the fourth prefetch counter (step S25TM1210) and sets the prefetch prohibition flag (step S25TM1220). , the process proceeds to step S25TM1230.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change effect is executed or not and the final display mode of the active display based on the table (see FIGS. 9-11) for determining whether the change effect is executed or not and the final display mode of the active display. Determine (step S25TM1230).

(Execution/non-execution of change effect and final display mode determination table for active display)
FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table for execution/non-execution of change effect and active display. As shown in FIGS. 9-11, in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 25TM003 is any of "normal mode (white mode)", "special mode", "blue mode" and "red mode". A judgment value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in Figure 9-11, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "missing (no time saving)" (that is, if the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (no time saving)") , the final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 10% It becomes a special mode (white triangle display), a 15% rate becomes a blue mode (blue circle display), and a 5% rate becomes a red mode (red circle display).

If the determination result at the time of the start winning is "missing (with time saving)" (that is, if the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the start winning (new number The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on 1 reserved memory) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 65%, and the special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 10%. , at a rate of 20%, it becomes a blue mode (blue circular display), and at a rate of 5%, it becomes a red mode (red circular display).

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the fluctuation display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the is a normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 30%, a special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 5%, and a blue mode at a rate of 25%. (blue circular display), and red mode (red circular display) at a rate of 40%.

If the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, if the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display is the normal mode (white circular display) at a rate of 100%.

In this way, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "small hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "small hit"), change production is executed at a rate of 100% It has been decided not to (set the final display mode of the active display 25TM003 to the normal mode (white circular display)). On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "missing (without time saving)", "missing (with time saving)", or "big hit" (that is, the decision result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing ( No time reduction)”, “loss (with time reduction)”, or “big hit”), execute a change production at a rate of 30 to 70% (the final display mode of the active display 25TM003, Select a special mode (white triangle), blue mode (blue circle), or red mode (red circle) that is different from the normal mode (white circle). ing. Therefore, when the change effect is executed, the display result is a display result other than "small hit" ("miss (without time saving)", "miss (with time saving)", or "big hit" display result) It is confirmed that

In addition, even when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "small hit", the determination value may be allocated so that the change effect can be executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the active display 25TM003 is changed from the normal mode (white circular display) into a special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circular display), or a red mode ( A red circular display) is called a change effect (active change effect). Therefore, the final display mode of the active display is a special mode (white triangle display) different from the normal mode (white circular display), a blue mode (blue circular display), or a red mode (red circular display). is to execute a change effect (active change effect) in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (any one of the special mode, the blue mode, and the red mode). is equivalent to determining

On the other hand, determining the final display mode of the active display to be the normal mode (white circular display) corresponds to determining not to execute the change effects (active change effect and pending change effect).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute a change effect (step S25TM1240). If it is decided not to execute the change effect (NO in step S25TM1240), the process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined to execute a change effect (YES in step 07TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 stores the change pattern of the change effect in the change pattern determination table of the change effect (FIGS. 9-12 and 9- 13) (step S25TM1250), sets the fifth prefetch counter (step S25TM1260), sets the prefetch prohibition flag (step S25TM1270), and terminates the process.

(Change pattern determination table for change effect)
9-12 and 9-13 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the change effect. When the number of first pending memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the starting winning, (i) the timing at which the n-th pending display 25TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 ( (ii) the timing at which the holding display 25TM001 corresponding to the starting winning shifts to a higher position (active display area 25TM013 side) in the holding display area 25TM011 (when n≧2); and (iii) at the timing when the pending display 25TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is shifted to the active display area 25TM013 (the timing at which the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed), the variable display based on the starting winning. There is a possibility that the display information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode due to the change effect.

In FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, for each change pattern, at each timing of (i) to (iii), the display mode of the display information corresponding to the variable display (suspended display 25TM001 or active display 25TM003) is shown. It shows how In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white circular display is displayed, and "special" indicates a special mode in which a white triangular display is displayed. , "blue" indicates a blue mode, which is a blue circular display, and "red" indicates a red mode, which is a red circular display.

([For one hold] Change pattern determination table for change effect)
When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 changes the [for one reserved] change effect shown in FIG. 9-12 (1). select the change pattern determination table.

In the description of FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the active shift means that the pending display 25TM001 shifts from the pending display area 25TM011 to the active display area 25TM013 (as a result, it becomes a determination target at the time of starting winning). display of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display).

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103 . The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift after the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the determination result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). case, or when the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving) ”), the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 60%, the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%. there is

In addition, regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 101 is The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201 described later, change pattern 301 described later, change pattern 401 described later. case), after the active shift, the active display 25TM003 will finally change from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change In the case of pattern 303, change pattern 402, and change pattern 403), after the active shift, the active display 25TM003 remains unchanged in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lose (no time saving), lose (with time saving), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 101, the variation pattern 102, the variation pattern 103, the variation pattern 104, and the variation pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which, after displaying the pending display of the notice target in the blue mode, the pending display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the determination result at the time of the start winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 101 is at a rate of 30% The variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned as follows.

As for the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 101 is 10%. , the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 30% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 25TM003 will change from the normal mode to the final blue mode. In addition, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change In the case of pattern 303, variation pattern 402 and variation pattern 403), after the active shift, the active indication 25TM003 will change from the special aspect to the final blue aspect. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205 described later, change pattern 304 and change In the case of pattern 305, change pattern 404 and change pattern 405), after the active shift, the active indication 25TM003 will remain in the blue mode and will not change.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lost (without time reduction), lost (with time reduction), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 101, the variation pattern 102, the variation pattern 103, the variation pattern 104, the variation pattern 105, the variation pattern 106, and the variation pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which, after the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode, the pending display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 101 is at a rate of 30% The variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 10%. , the variation pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the determination value is assigned so that the variation pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As for the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 101 is 4. %, the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 25% and the variation pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 25%.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active indication 25TM003 will change from the normal mode to finally the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change In the case of pattern 303, variation pattern 402 and variation pattern 403), after the active shift the active indication 25TM003 will change from the special aspect to the final red aspect. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205 described later, change pattern 304 and change In the case of pattern 304, variation pattern 404 and variation pattern 405), after the active shift the active indication 25TM003 will change from the blue aspect to the final red aspect. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 106 and change pattern 107, change pattern 206 to change pattern 208 described later, change pattern 306 to change In the case of pattern 310, change pattern 406 to change pattern 410), after the active shift, the active display 25TM003 remains in the red mode and does not change.

([For two pending] change pattern determination table of change effect)
When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 performs [for two reserved] change effects shown in FIG. 9-12 (2) select the change pattern determination table.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lose (no time saving), lose (with time saving), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 201, the variation pattern 202, and the variation pattern 203, respectively. In the change pattern 202, after the suspension display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the suspension display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the suspension display of the notice object is displayed at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in a special mode, and in the change pattern 203, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern that does not change as it is, and does not change the pending display of the announcement target at the timing of the active shift as it is in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the determination result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 201 is at a rate of 60% The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20% and the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. is determined at a rate of , the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lose (no time saving), lose (with time saving), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 201, the variation pattern 202, the variation pattern 203, the variation pattern 204, and the variation pattern 205, respectively. In the change pattern 204, after the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 205 changes the pending display of the notice target to a blue mode, and the change pattern 205 displays the pending display of the notice target in a blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the hold display of the notice target to blue at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the mode is not changed, and the suspension display of the announcement target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the determination result at the time of the start winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 201 is at a rate of 40% The pattern of change 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern of change 203 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern of change 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the pattern of change 205 is determined at a rate of 10%. Judgment values are assigned as follows.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201 is 10% when the judgment result at the start winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"). , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 30% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lost (without time reduction), lost (with time reduction), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 201, the variation pattern 202, the variation pattern 203, the variation pattern 204, the variation pattern 205, the variation pattern 206, the variation pattern 207, and the variation pattern 208, respectively. In the change pattern 206, after displaying the suspension display of the notice object in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 207 changes the pending display of the notice target to a red mode, and the change pattern 207 displays the pending display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the hold display of the notice target to red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 208 is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift and is not changed to the red mode. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice object is not changed to the red state at the timing of the hold shift of (1), and the hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red state at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 201 is at a rate of 35% , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 10%. , the variation pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 5%, the variation pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 201 is 2%. , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 4%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 4%, the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 15% , the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 20%.

([For 3 pending] Change pattern determination table for change effect)
When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 changes effect [for 3 reserved] shown in FIG. 9-13 (3) select the change pattern determination table.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lose (no time saving), lose (with time saving), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 301, the variation pattern 302, and the variation pattern 303, respectively. In the change pattern 302, after the holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first holding shift, and the timing of the second holding shift. is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying in the special mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the second hold shift. , is a change pattern in which the pending display of the announcement target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the determination result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 301 is at a rate of 60% The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20% and the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 301 is 40%. , the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lose (no time saving), lose (with time saving), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 301, the variation pattern 302, the variation pattern 303, the variation pattern 304, and the variation pattern 305, respectively. In the change pattern 304, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the notice target is not changed to the normal mode, and the suspension display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying in the blue mode, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first suspension shift, and the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second suspension shift. , is a change pattern in which the pending display of the announcement target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the determination result at the time of the start winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "off (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "off (with time saving)"), the change pattern 301 is at a rate of 30% The pattern of change 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern of change 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern of change 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the pattern of change 305 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned as follows.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 30% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lost (without time reduction), lost (with time reduction), or big hit) Accordingly, the determination values are determined for the variation pattern 301, the variation pattern 302, the variation pattern 303, the variation pattern 304, the variation pattern 305, the variation pattern 306, the variation pattern 307, the variation pattern 308, the variation pattern 309, and the variation pattern 310, respectively. Allocated. In the change pattern 306, after the hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the active shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying, at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, and is active This is a change pattern for changing the pending display of the notice target to a red mode at the timing of the shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "off (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "off (with time saving)"), the change pattern 301 is at a rate of 30% The pattern of change 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern of change 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern of change 304 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the pattern of change 305 is determined at a rate of 10%. , the change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 2%, the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 2%, the change pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 2%, the change pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 2%, and the change The judgment values are assigned so that the pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 15% , the variation pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the variation pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 8% and the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 8%.

([For 4 pending] Change pattern determination table for change effect)
When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 changes the [for 4 reserved] change effect shown in FIG. 9-13 (4). select the change pattern determination table.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lose (no time saving), lose (with time saving), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 401, the variation pattern 402, and the variation pattern 403, respectively. In the change pattern 402, after the holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first holding shift, and the timing of the second holding shift. does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and changes the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern 403, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. , at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, and at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the pending display of the notice target as it is in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the determination result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 401 is at a rate of 60% The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20% and the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 401 is 40%. is determined at a rate of , the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lose (no time saving), lose (with time saving), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 401, the variation pattern 402, the variation pattern 403, the variation pattern 404, and the variation pattern 405, respectively. In the change pattern 404, after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. , do not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, do not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and change the hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern 405, after the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. , at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, and at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the announcement target is kept in the blue mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the determination result at the time of the start winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 401 is at a rate of 30% The variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned as follows.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401 is 10% when the determination result at the start winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"). , the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 30% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, lost (without time reduction), lost (with time reduction), or big hit) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 401, the variation pattern 402, the variation pattern 403, the variation pattern 404, the variation pattern 405, the variation pattern 406, the variation pattern 407, the variation pattern 408, the variation pattern 409, and the variation pattern 410, respectively. is In the change pattern 406, after the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. , does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, changes the hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and changes the hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern 407, after the holding display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the holding display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode, at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the notice target The change pattern 408 changes the pending display of the notice target to a red mode, and the change pattern 408 displays the pending display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then displays the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without changing the mode, at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode, and is active. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the shift, and the change pattern 409 displays the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display of the notice object is changed to a red mode, the hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is, and does not change the pending display of the notice target at the timing of the active shift to the red mode. At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode, at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode, and the timing of the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the announcement target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the suspension display of the announcement target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing (with time saving)"), the change pattern 401 is at a rate of 35% The variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 10%. , the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the determination result at the time of the start winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. , the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15% and the judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 40%.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the object of determination at the time of starting winning can be changed from the normal mode to the special mode or the blue mode. , and can be changed from the special mode to the red mode. In addition, the pending display corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning does not change from the blue mode to any mode, nor does it change from the red mode to any mode. Therefore, the special mode as the mode of the pending display is a mode that suggests a change to the red mode, and the case where the pending display is displayed in the special mode is higher than the case where the pending display is displayed in the normal mode. , the rate of change to the red mode is higher.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the change pattern of the change effect is determined according to the determination result (display result specified by the symbol specification command) at the time of starting winning. Although an example in which a value is assigned is shown, the judgment value is not limited to such a form, and the judgment value is in the change pattern of the change production according to the judgment result (variation pattern specified by the change category command) at the time of starting winning. It may be allocated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, there is no change pattern in which the pending display changes from blue to red. A change pattern that changes from blue to red may be provided. For example, when the number of pending memories becomes 3 based on the start winning, the hold display corresponding to the start win is displayed in a normal mode (or a special mode), and at the time of the first hold shift, the hold display is displayed normally. A pattern may be provided in which the mode (or special mode) changes to blue, and the hold display changes from blue to red during the second hold shift. If the timing at which the hold display changes from blue to red is late (for example, during the second hold shift), if the timing at which the hold display changes from blue to red is early (for example, during the first hold shift) ), the degree of expectation for a big hit may be higher. Conversely, if the hold display changes from blue to red early (for example, during the first hold shift), if the hold display changes from blue to red late (for example, The degree of expectation for a big hit may be higher than in the case of the second holding shift.

(Example of production when starting winning during a period different from the specific period)
Next, a new start winning occurs during a period different from the specific period (that is, a period different from either the symbol stop period or the symbol fixed period), and in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the winning is performed. 9-14 and 9-15 for examples of effects when it is decided to execute the time blackout effect, the connection zone effect, the winning flash effect, the chance effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect. explain.

FIG. 9-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the blackout effect at the time of winning, the connection zone effect, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect, and FIG. 9-15. is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects. In FIGS. 9-15, the mode of the light emitter 25TM100 is shown in the vicinity of the image display device 5 (upper right part) in correspondence with the rendering diagram.

In this example, in the start-up winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the winning blackout effect in step S25TM1050, and in step S25TM1100 wins flash effect in white light emission mode. , in step S25TM1150 it is decided to execute the odd-numbered chance effect, in step S25TM1190 it is decided to execute the second mode comment notice effect, and in step S25TM1230 the final active display is determined. It is assumed that the display mode is determined to be the red mode, the variation performance is determined to be executed, and the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern 208 in step S25TM1250.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. In the display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative pattern [third layer] is variably displayed, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the small pattern [first layer] is variably displayed. Run. The effect control CPU 120 displays a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] representing a sunny landscape including the sky and mountains as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 25TM013, and the first reserved storage number is 1. Based on this, it is assumed that one suspension display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode is displayed in the suspension display area 25TM011 of the image display device 5 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (2), in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, when executing the variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer], a new start It is assumed that a prize has been won and the first reserved memory number has become 2 (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-14). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the number of first reserved memories has increased. The effect control CPU 120 executes the winning blackout effect based on the received command, and displays the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] of the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the suspended display 25TM001 [third layer] of the normal mode in the suspended display area 25TM011. is continuously arranged, and based on receiving a command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased, a pending change effect is executed as a change effect, and a red color is displayed in the first pending display area 25TM0011 A new pending indication 25TM001C [third layer] of the mode is placed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer < third layer < second layer, the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 By displaying the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (normal mode suspension display 25TM001 , the red state of the pending display 25TM001C, and the normal state of the active display 25TM003) [the third layer] is in a difficult-to-recognize state (non-display state).

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5 to display "2" [first layer]. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer<the first layer. Even if the out-image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed, "2" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025, And the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] is not lowered.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes a win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, blinks the light emitter 25TM100 in white, and reproduces and outputs the light effect sound A once from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 changes the covering image to the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [first 2 layer] to the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]. Then, at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning blackout effect, and the image display device. 5 continues to display the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as a cover image covering the entire display screen. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, causing the light emitter 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (“243” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 . In other words, the combination of the decorative symbols that result in the display result being "no (no time saving)" is determined and stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] of the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the suspended display 25TM001 [third layer] of the normal mode in the suspended display area 25TM011. The pending display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode is continuously arranged. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer < third layer < second layer, the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (normal mode suspension display 25TM001 , the red state of the pending display 25TM001C, and the normal state of the active display 25TM003) [the third layer] is in a difficult-to-recognize state (non-display state).

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5 to display "2" [first layer]. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . Also, the effect control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (“243” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In other words, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "no (no time saving)" is determined and stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer<the first layer. Even if the out-image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, "2" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025, And the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] is not lowered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 changes the black The out effect is continuously executed, and the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, causing the light emitter 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 arranges the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the active display area 25TM013 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1, and also arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the reserved display area 25TM011. The pending display 25TM001C [3rd layer] in the red mode that had been displayed is shifted by one toward the active display area 25TM013, and the pending display 25TM001 [3rd layer] in the normal mode placed in the pending display area 25TM011 is deleted. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second form of the comment notice effect, and in the third layer, the mini-character and the second comment image (“Next, expect!” comment image) [3rd layer] is placed.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer < third layer < second layer, the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], the corresponding display (red mode pending display 25TM001C, The visibility of the normal mode active display 25TM003) [3rd layer] and the mini-character and second comment image [3rd layer] has decreased and is in a difficult-to-see state (non-display state).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is displayed. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer<the first layer. Even if the out-image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025, And the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] is not lowered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (5), an odd-numbered chance effect is executed, and a combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (in this example, odd-numbered symbols combination “135”) is stopped in an expanded manner (period T5A-T5B shown in FIGS. 9-14). After that, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning blackout effect at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-14), A second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, causing the light emitter 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (“135” in this example) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 . In other words, the combination of the decorative symbols that result in the display result being "no (no time saving)" is determined and stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the suspended display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode in the suspended display area 25TM011. placed continuously. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer < third layer < second layer, the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (red mode pending display 25TM001C , Normal mode active display 25TM003) [Third layer] is in a difficult-to-recognize state (non-display state) due to a decrease in visibility.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . Also, the effect control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (“135” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In other words, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "no (no time saving)" is determined and stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer<the first layer. Even if the out-image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025, And the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] is not lowered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display for which the blackout effect is announced at the time of winning) (as shown in FIG. 9-14) At the timing of T7 shown), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the winning blackout effect, executes the first effect in the connection zone effect, erases the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], and displays the image. A flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] including the characters "Battle ZONE" is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the display device 5 . In addition, the background image of the decorative pattern is changed from the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] to the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] representing a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, volcanic smoke, and the characters "Battle Zone". is changed to In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, causing the light emitter 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes an active change effect as a change effect as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and arranges a red mode active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the active display area 25TM013. At the same time, the red pending display 25TM001C [third layer] displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 is erased.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer < third layer < second layer, the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 By displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer], the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display 25TM003C in red mode) [ The visibility of the third layer] is lowered and it is in a difficult-to-see state (non-display state).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is displayed. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer<the first layer. Even if 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed, "0" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025, and small The visibility of the pattern [first layer] has not decreased.
?

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (7), at the timing after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first When the 1st effect is completed, the 2nd effect in the connection zone effect is executed (shifted from the 1st effect to the 2nd effect), the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is erased, and the special background is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. The image 25TM200B [fourth layer] is continuously displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, causing the light emitter 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variation of the decoration pattern [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 . Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 continuously arranges the active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the red mode in the active display area 25TM013.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since neither image is displayed in the second layer, which has a higher display priority than the fourth and third layers, the special background image 25TM200B as the background image is displayed. The visibility of the [fourth layer], the decoration pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display 25TM003C in red mode) [third layer] is improved, and all of them are in a visible state.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display "0" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, Since the second reserved memory count is 0, the second reserved memory count display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 continues to display "0" [first layer].

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the second layer<the first layer, it is determined whether the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed. Regardless, "0" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025, and small patterns [first layer] It is visible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (8), at the timing (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 9-14) to establish the ready-to-reach state in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 is the second in the connection zone effect. The effect is continuously executed, and the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] is continuously displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, and extinguishes the light emitter 25TM100.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to stop and display the decorative pattern [third layer] of "7" in the pattern display area 5L and the pattern display area 5R, thereby causing the image display device 5 to enter a ready-to-win state. Display the characters "Reach!!" [3rd layer] at the top. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the red mode in the active display area 25TM013.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to variably display the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, a small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative pattern [third layer] is stopped and displayed, and a small pattern corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative pattern [third layer] is stopped and displayed. Also in the display area 5r, the small pattern [first layer] is continuously and variably displayed without being stopped. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display "0" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, Since the second reserved memory count is 0, the second reserved memory count display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 continues to display "0" [first layer].

Next, at the timing (timing of T10 shown in FIG. 9-14) to develop super reach in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 ends the connection zone effect and erases the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer]. Then, either the battle B effect or the battle C effect is executed.

(Example of production when starting prize during a specific period)
Next, a new start winning occurs during a specific period (that is, either the period during which the symbols are stopped or the period during which the symbols are fixed). 9-16 and 9-17, an example of the effect when it is decided to execute the effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect will be described.

FIG. 9-16 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the winning flash effect, the chance effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an image; In FIGS. 9-17, the mode of the light emitter 25TM100 is shown in the vicinity of the image display device 5 (upper right part) in correspondence with the production drawing.

In this example, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines YES in step S25TM1030, thereby skipping step S25TM1050 for determining whether or not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning. In step S25TM1100, it is decided to execute the white light emitting state flash effect at the time of winning, in step S25TM1150 it is decided to execute the odd number mode chance eye effect, and in step S25TM1190 the second mode comment notice effect is executed. In step S25TM1230, the final display mode of the active display is determined to be the red mode, and in step S25TM1250, it is determined to execute the change effect, and the change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 208 in step S25TM1250.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. In the display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative pattern [third layer] is displayed in a variable manner, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the small pattern [first layer] is varied. Display is running. The effect control CPU 120 displays a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] representing a sunny landscape including the sky and mountains as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 25TM013, and the first reserved storage number is 1. Based on this, it is assumed that one suspension display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode is displayed in the suspension display area 25TM011 of the image display device 5 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-16), the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device. 5, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] ("243" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. Then, it is assumed that when the combination of the decorative symbols whose display result is "lost (no time saving)" is fixed and stopped, a new start winning has occurred and the first reserved memory number has become 2 (Fig. 9) -16 timing of T2A). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the number of first reserved memories has increased.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes a win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, blinks the light emitter 25TM100 in white, and reproduces and outputs the light effect sound A once from the speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the active display area 25TM013, and the normal mode suspended display 25TM001 [third layer] in the suspended display area 25TM011. is continuously displayed, and based on the reception of a command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased, a pending change effect is executed as a change effect, and a red color is displayed in the first pending display area 25TM0011 The pending display 25TM001C [third layer] of the mode is newly displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5 to display "2" [first layer]. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority increases in the order of 4th layer<3rd layer<2nd layer<1st layer. is not executed, the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed. , decorative pattern [third layer], corresponding display (normal mode pending display 25TM001, red mode pending display 25TM001C, normal mode active display 25TM003) [third layer], "2" in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015 " [first layer], "0" [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and small patterns [first layer] are all visible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-16), the effect control CPU 120 is in the white light emission mode. The winning flash effect is continuously executed, and the light emitter 25TM100 is blinking in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Let In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the active display area 25TM013 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1, and displays it in the reserved display area 25TM011. The pending display 25TM001C [3rd layer] in the red mode that had been displayed is shifted by one toward the active display area 25TM013, and the pending display 25TM001 [3rd layer] in the normal mode displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 is erased. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second form of the comment notice effect, and displays the mini-character 25TM400 and the second comment image 25TM450 (“Next, expect!” comment image) [3rd layer] is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is displayed. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority increases in the order of 4th layer<3rd layer<2nd layer<1st layer. is not executed, the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed. , Decorative pattern [3rd layer], corresponding display (reserved display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [3rd layer], "1" of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 [1st layer], Both "0" [first layer] and small patterns [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 are visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (4), at the timing when the chance effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance effect in the odd mode, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R , the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (in this example, the combination of odd-numbered symbols “135”) is stopped and displayed in an enlarged manner (period of T4A to T4B shown in FIGS. 9-16). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, causing the light emitter 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and displays the suspended display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode in the suspended display area 25TM011. display continuously. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is displayed. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority increases in the order of 4th layer<3rd layer<2nd layer<1st layer. is not executed, the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed. , Decorative pattern [3rd layer], corresponding display (reserved display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [3rd layer], "1" of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 [1st layer], Both "0" [first layer] and small patterns [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 are visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance eye effect. , and the combination of decorative patterns [third layer] (“135” in this example) is confirmed and stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 . In other words, the combination of the decorative symbols that result in the display result being "no (no time saving)" is determined and stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, causing the light emitter 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the suspended display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode in the suspended display area 25TM011. is continuously displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 1, the effect control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. Since the number of reserved memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 . Also, the effect control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (“135” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In other words, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "no (no time saving)" is determined and stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority increases in the order of 4th layer<3rd layer<2nd layer<1st layer. is not executed, the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed. , Decorative pattern [3rd layer], corresponding display (reserved display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [3rd layer], "1" of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 [1st layer], Both "0" [first layer] and small patterns [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025 are visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (6), at the timing (shown in FIG. 9-16), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display that is subject to notice of the flash effect at the time of winning). At the timing of T6), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, causing the light emitter 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Let In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes an active change effect as a change effect as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and displays an active display 25TM003C [third layer] in a red mode in the active display area 25TM013. At the same time, the red pending display 25TM001C [third layer] displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 is erased. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is displayed. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer<3rd layer<2nd layer<1st layer, but in this example, connection zone effect is executed. As a result, the covering image (flame effect image) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed. Display (active display 25TM003C in red mode) [third layer], "0" in first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 [first layer], "0" in second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 [first layer] , and the small pattern [first layer] are all visible.

As shown in FIG. 9-17 (8), at the timing (timing of T7 shown in FIG. 9-16) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 controls the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5. Then, the decorative pattern of "7" (3rd layer) is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5R to enter the ready-to-win state, and the characters "reach!!" At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the win-win flash effect in the white light emission mode, and extinguishes the light emitter 25TM100.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the red mode active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the active display area 25TM013. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to variably display the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, a small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative pattern [third layer] is stopped and displayed, and a small pattern corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative pattern [third layer] is stopped and displayed. Also in the display area 5r, the small pattern [first layer] is continuously and variably displayed without being stopped. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display "0" [first layer] in the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, Since the second reserved memory count is 0, the second reserved memory count display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5 continues to display "0" [first layer].

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer<3rd layer<2nd layer<1st layer, but in this example, connection zone effect is executed. As a result, the covering image (flame effect image) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed. Display (active display 25TM003C in red mode) [third layer], "0" in first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 [first layer], "0" in second reserved memory number display area 25TM025 [first layer] , and the small pattern [first layer] are all visible.

<Second embodiment>
[Production determination process at the time of start winning]
FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19 are a second embodiment of a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the time of starting winning. Effect control CPU120, in the pre-reading notice setting processing (step S161) of the effect control process processing shown in FIG. Run.

As shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, steps S25TM1000 to S25TM1130 and steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1270 in the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment are shown in FIGS. Since the steps are the same as steps S25TM1000 to S25TM1130 and steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1270 in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment shown in -7, the description will be omitted here, and only step S25TM1135 will be described. do.

After completing the process of step S25TM1130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific flag is set (step S25TM1135). If the specific flag is set (YES in step S25TM1135), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. If the specific flag is not set (NO in step S25TM1135), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1140.

In this way, when the specific flag is not set (that is, when the winning blackout effect is not executed and it is not decided to execute the winning blackout effect), the start winning is not performed. In the start-up winning effect determination process when it occurs, it is possible to perform the processes from step S25TM1020 onward by determining NO in step S25TM1010. At this time, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a winning blackout effect in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S25TM1050). YES at step S25TM1080), the specific flag is set (step S25TM1080), and a determination of YES is made at step S25TM1135, thereby skipping the processing from step S25TM1140. That is, each of the process of determining whether or not to execute the chance eye effect (step S25TM1150), the process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1190), and the process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230). Processing will be skipped. Therefore, at least during the period during which the winning-time blackout effect is being executed, the execution of the chance effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect is restricted.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-15, a new start winning occurs during a period different from the specific period (that is, a period different from either the symbol stop period or the symbol fixed period), and the start winning effect of the first embodiment. Although the example of the effect when it is decided to execute various effects based on the determination process has been shown, the example of the effect when it is decided to execute various effects based on the effect determination process at the time of starting winning in the second embodiment 9-15 may also be similar to the presentation examples shown in FIGS. 9-15.

That is, when it is decided to execute various effects based on the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment, the image display device 5 displays effect images similar to the effect images shown in FIGS. may be displayed. In this case, when the winning-time blackout effect is executed, the execution of the predetermined effects (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) is restricted.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-17, a new start winning occurs during a specific period (that is, either the symbol stop period or the symbol fixed period), and in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, various effects Although the example of the effect when it is decided to execute is shown, the example of the effect when it is decided to execute various effects based on the effect determination process at the time of starting winning in the second embodiment is also shown in FIGS. 9-17 You may make it the same as the shown example of production.

That is, when it is decided to execute various effects based on the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment, the effect image similar to the effect image shown in FIG. 9-17 is displayed on the image display device 5. may be displayed. In this case, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the predetermined effects (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) are executed.

(Award-winning performance)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the [description of the characterizing part 25TM] of the present embodiment may be a gaming machine having a movable body 25TM500 as an accessory in the vicinity (below) of the image display device 5 . The movable body 25TM500 is operable between the tilted position (initial position) and the standing position (drawing position) according to the control of the performance control board 12 . The movable body 25TM500 is not positioned in front of the image display device 5 when the movable body 25TM500 is at the tilted position. However, it is assumed that at least part of the movable body 25TM500 is positioned in front of the image display device 5 in the process of moving the movable body 25TM500 from the tilted position to the standing position, or when the movable body 25TM500 is in the standing position. do.

In this embodiment, at the timing when the starting prize is generated, as a special effect to notify that the expectation of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is high, the blackout effect at the time of winning and the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed. is shown, but it is not limited to such a form, and other special effects may be executed. For example, as a special effect, a winning accessory effect using the movable body 25TM500 may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-20(A), the effect control CPU 120 can execute a prize-winning accessory effect based on the determination result at the start-up winning. The prize-winning character effect is a gold effect image 25TM600A [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the timing determined to execute the prize-winning character effect at the time of start winning. is displayed, and a movable body motion presentation is executed to move the movable body 25TM500 from the tilted position to the standing position. The display color of the golden effect image 25TM600A in the prize-winning role production is gold, and the player can recognize that the variation display corresponding to the starting prize has a high expectation for a big hit by executing the prize-winning role production. .

Specifically, the prize-winning accessory effect is based on the determination result at the time of the start-up winning, and the gold effect image 25TM600A [second layer], it is suggested that the display result of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (the variable display in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met) will be a big win. In this case, the prize-winning accessory effect is executed as a pre-reading foretelling effect.

In the present embodiment, when the prize-winning role production is started based on the determination result at the time of the start winning, the prize-winning role production is displayed in a variable display corresponding to the start winning (the target of the prize-winning role production) It is assumed that it is continuously executed until the timing when a certain variable display) is started.

In this embodiment, the background image [fourth layer], the decorative pattern [third layer], and the The visibility of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) [third layer] is reduced to make it difficult to see (non-display state). Furthermore, in the process of moving the movable body 25TM500 from the tilted position to the standing position, and when the movable body 25TM500 is in the standing position, at least part of the movable body 25TM500 is positioned in front of the image display device 5. , the visibility of the screen of the image display device 5 is lowered. That is, the visibility of the effect images ([first layer], [second layer], [third layer], [fourth layer]) displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 part visibility) is reduced.

Here, the background image [4th layer], decorative pattern [3rd layer], corresponding display (suspended display, active display) [3rd layer] continue to be in an invisible state due to the prize-winning performance. , as shown in FIG. 9-20 (A), "2" [first layer] of the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and The small patterns [first layer] in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r remain visible.

In this way, the visibility of the background image [fourth layer], the decoration pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer] is reduced by the winning performance, The movable body 25TM500 moves from the tilted position to the upright position, and in the upright position, the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015, the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025, and the small pattern display of the image display device 5. Since it is not located in front of areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the visibility of the value of the number of reserved memories [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer] is lowered even during the execution period of the prize-winning character effect. It is in a state where it can be visually recognized continuously.

Thus, the award-winning accessory effect is an example of a special effect performed using the image display device 5 that displays the golden effect image 25TM600A [second layer] and the movable body 25TM500 in the movable body motion effect. On the other hand, the winning flash effect is an example of a special effect performed using the light emitter 25TM100 and the speakers 8L and 8R (devices for reproducing and outputting the light-emitting sound effect A or the light-emitting sound effect B). In this way, the prize-winning accessory effect as a special effect is a effect executed using two effect devices (the image display device 5 and the movable body 25TM500), and the prize-winning flash effect as a special effect is a prize-winning effect. This is a production performed using two production devices (the light emitter 25TM100 and the speakers 8L and 8R) different from the production of the occasional character. In addition, the performance device used for the performance is different (there is no duplication) between the prize-winning accessory performance and the prize-winning flash performance. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to clarify the difference between the types of special effects, it is possible to give different impressions to the player depending on the types of special effects.

It should be noted that a partly common effect device may be used for the prize-winning character effect and the prize-winning flash effect. 8L and 8R (devices for reproducing and outputting sound effects when the character moves), whereas in the winning flash effect, the light emitting body 25TM100 and the speakers 8L and 8R (light effect sound A or light effect sound) are used. A device for reproducing and outputting sound B) may be used. In this case, the prize-winning accessory production as a special production is a production performed using three production devices (the image display device 5 and the movable body 25TM500, and the speakers 8L and 8R). The flash performance at the time of winning is performed using two performance devices, a performance device (light emitting body 25TM100) different from the performance at the time of winning and the performance device (speakers 8L, 8R) common to the performance at the time of winning. is. In this way, it is possible to clarify the difference in the types of special effects according to the number of effect devices used for the special effects, and to give different impressions to the player depending on the types of special effects.

(blessing performance)
In the present embodiment, in a state in which a friendly character is making a final attack on an enemy character in the battle production, a predetermined timing (the timing at which the operation promotion display should be displayed, for example, five seconds before the display result is stopped) is displayed. ), an operation prompting display imitating the shape of the stick controller 31A, a time bar for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A is effective, and "Close !!” is displayed.

At this time, when the battle effect of the variation pattern with the super ready-to-win where the display result is "big win" is being executed, it is assumed that the big win will occur at the timing when the stick controller 31A is operated by the player. A blessing role production for blessing (announcing) is executed. Then, after the execution of the congratulatory character presentation, the ally character wins over the enemy character, and the jackpot pattern is completed. In the blessing accessory production, the rainbow color effect image 25TM600B [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body 25TM500 moves from the tilted position to the standing position. Execution of the action effect informs that a big win will occur. The display color of the rainbow color effect image 25TM600B in the congratulatory accessory production is rainbow, and the player can recognize that a big win will occur by executing the congratulatory accessory production.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20(B), the background image [ 4th layer], decoration pattern [3rd layer], corresponding display (suspended display, active display) [3rd layer], production image related to battle production [3rd layer] Visibility is reduced to make it difficult to see ( non-display state). Furthermore, in the process of moving the movable body 25TM500 from the tilted position to the standing position, and when the movable body 25TM500 is in the standing position, at least part of the movable body 25TM500 is positioned in front of the image display device 5. , the visibility of the image display device 5 is lowered. That is, the visibility of the effect images ([first layer], [second layer], [third layer], [fourth layer]) displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 part visibility) is reduced.

Here, by the blessing role production, the background image [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], the corresponding display (holding display, active display) [3rd layer], and the production image related to the battle production [3rd layer] layer] continues to be in a visually difficult state, but as shown in FIG. The "0" [first layer] of 25TM025 and the small symbols [first layer] of the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r remain visible.

In this way, by the blessing role production, the background image [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], the corresponding display (holding display, active display) [3rd layer], and the production image related to the battle production [3rd layer] 3 layers], while the movable body 25TM500 moves from the tilted position to the upright position and in the upright position, the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, the second 2 Since it is not located in front of the reserved memory number display area 25TM025 and the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the value of the reserved memory number [first layer] and the small The visibility of the pattern [first layer] is continuously visible without deterioration.

In this way, in the prize-winning accessory presentation and the blessing accessory presentation, the effect image [second layer] is displayed as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body 25TM500 is raised from the tilted position. It is a common production mode in that the movable body action production to move to the position is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute, as a look-ahead foretelling effect, the award-winning accessory effect, which is a common effect mode with the blessing accessory effect as the big-hit notification effect.

In the award-winning accessory presentation and the blessing accessory presentation, an effect image [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body 25TM500 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position. Although it is a common production mode in that the movable body action production is executed, the effect image [second layer] mode (effect image [second layer ] types) are different.

That is, in the prize-winning performance, the gold effect image 25TM600A (display color: gold) that suggests (informs) that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is displayed on the entire display screen of the image display device 5. is displayed as a cover image covering the , and in the blessing role production, a rainbow color effect image 25TM600B (display color: rainbow color) that suggests (informs) that a big hit will occur based on the variable display that is being executed is displayed as an image display It is displayed as a covering image that covers the entire display screen of the device 5 . As described above, there is a difference in the mode of presentation (the display color of the effect image) between the prize-winning accessory presentation and the congratulatory accessory presentation. Therefore, the player can easily grasp which of the award-winning accessory presentation and the blessing accessory presentation is performed when the movable body action presentation is performed together with the presentation of the covering image being displayed on the entire screen. .

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-15, when the winning-time black effect is executed as a special effect, a blackout image [second layer] is used as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), a decorative pattern [third layer] and a corresponding display (red mode pending display 25TM001C ) [3rd layer], mini-characters and comment images [3rd layer] are difficult to see due to reduced visibility. That is, during the period in which the black effect at the time of winning is being executed, the corresponding display (holding display, active display) [third layer] is used to change the effect, the decorative pattern [third layer] is used to create the chance eye effect, and The visibility of the comment notice effect using the mini-character and the comment image [third layer] is lowered, making it difficult to see. In this way, when the black effect at the time of winning is executed, the change effect, the chance effect, and the comment notice effect can be executed. Such effect images are not visible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the winning-time black effect is not executed and the winning-time flash effect is executed as a special effect, a cover image (black Since the out image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer])) is not displayed, the decorative pattern [third layer] and the corresponding display (red mode pending display 25TM001C ) [3rd layer] and the mini-character and comment image [3rd layer] are both visible.

In this way, when the black effect at the time of winning is not executed and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the corresponding display (holding display, active display) [third layer] is used, and the decorative pattern [third layer]. and the comment notice effect using mini characters and comment images [3rd layer]. . That is, when the winning blackout effect is not executed and the winning flash effect is executed, the change effect, the chance effect, and the comment notice effect can all be executed in a visually recognizable manner. Compared to the case where the out effect is executed, the visibility of the effect is not restricted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-9(A), the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the winning blackout effect is executed than when the winning blackout effect is not executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B), when the winning flash effect is executed, the expectation of the big win is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed, and the winning flash effect is higher. When the performance is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the winning flash performance in the red light emitting mode than in the white lighting mode in the winning flash performance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9(C), when the chance game effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the chance game effect is not executed, and the chance game effect is executed. In this case, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in the odd-numbered mode of chance game presentation than in the even-numbered mode of chance game presentation. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-10, when the comment notice effect is executed, the expectation of the big win is higher than when the comment notice effect is not executed, and when the comment notice effect is executed. , the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the comment advance notice effect of the second mode than in the comment advance notice effect of the first mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the change effect is executed, the expectation of the big hit is higher than when the change effect is not executed, and the final display mode of the active display is changed to a special mode. Expectation level of big hit in the order of change effect of special mode to be changed <change effect of blue mode to change final display mode of active display to blue mode <change effect of red mode to change final display mode of active display to red mode Is high.

Therefore, the greater the number of effects performed in combination among the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect, the higher the expected degree of jackpot. becomes higher. For example, when all the effects of the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect are executed, the expectation of the big hit is higher than the case where only the comment notice effect is executed. getting higher.

In addition, if the number of effects to be executed in combination is the same among the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect (if the number of combined effects is the same In some cases, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when there are more performance modes with higher expectations for big win than when there are fewer performance modes with higher expectations for big win. For example, when a winning blackout effect, a winning flash effect in red light mode, an odd number mode chance eye effect, a second mode comment notice effect, and a red mode changing effect are executed, the blackout effect in winning a prize is executed. , white luminous mode winning flash performance, even number mode chance game performance, first mode comment notice performance, and special mode change performance are higher than the case of execution.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, regardless of whether or not it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment (step S25TM1060 YES or NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs the processes after step S25TM1090. In other words, in both cases (YES or NO in step S25TM1060), whether it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning or not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning. , the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180), determines whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220), and determines whether or not the change effect is executed. (Steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1270) are performed.

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the display screen of the image display device 5 abruptly changes over a wide range by executing the blackout effect at the time of winning, which can give the player surprise. . In addition, when the winning flash performance is executed together with the winning blackout performance, the interest can be improved in that the player pays attention to the degree of combination of the predetermined performances (chance performance, comment notice performance, change performance). On the other hand, even when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, a process for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) and the effect mode is executed. It is possible to standardize the processing (decision processing regarding whether or not to execute an effect, determination processing of the effect mode).

As shown in FIG. 9-15, at the timing (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-14) determined to execute the winning blackout effect at the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning blackout effect. At the timing when the effect is started and the variable display corresponding to the start winning (variable display which is the target of the blackout effect when winning a prize) is started (the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 9-14), the blackout effect when winning a prize is performed. As soon as it ends, the connection zone effect is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-15, at the timing (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-14) determined to execute the win-time flash effect at the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 A flash effect is started, and at a predetermined timing (in this example, the timing at which reach is established) in the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning), the flash effect at the time of winning ends. , running a reach rendition.

According to such a configuration, the connection zone effect is executed at the timing when the winning blackout effect as the special effect ends, and the ready-to-win effect is executed at the timing when the winning flash effect as the special effect ends. Interest can be improved by making the player pay attention to the mode of performance when the special performance ends. In addition, since the mode of performance when the special performance ends differs depending on the type of special performance, the performance can be further diversified.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), when the prize-winning blackout effect is executed, a blackout image (first blackout image) is used as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. An image 25TM300B1 [second layer] and a second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]) are displayed. At this time, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] is continuously arranged on the fourth layer as the background image of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the fourth layer<the second layer, the blackout image (the first By displaying the blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] and the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the visibility of the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image is lowered and visually recognized. It is in a difficult state (hidden state). According to such a configuration, execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning gives the player a sense of specialness and unexpectedness of the effect, thereby improving interest.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), when the prize-winning blackout effect is executed, a blackout image (first blackout image) is used as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. An image 25TM300B1 [second layer] and a second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]) are displayed.

At this time, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative patterns [third layer] are changed, and in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative patterns [ 3rd layer] ("243" and "135" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. In addition, the active display (normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer]) is continuously arranged in the active display area 25TM013, and the suspended display (normal mode suspended display 25TM001 [third layer]) is continuously arranged in the suspended display area 25TM011. ) are continuously placed.

At this time, the value of the first reserved billion number (“1” [first layer], “2” [first layer]) is displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the image The value of the second reserved memory count (“0” [first layer]) is displayed in the second reserved memory count display area 25TM025 of the display device 5 . Further, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small pattern [first layer] is continuously displayed in a variable manner.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of the third layer<second layer<first layer, the covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 As a blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]) is displayed, the decorative pattern [third layer] and the corresponding display (hold display , active display) [3rd layer] visibility is reduced and it is in a difficult to see state (hidden state), while the value of the first reserved memory number [1st layer], the value of the second reserved memory number The visibility of both the value [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer] has not decreased. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the visibility of the information related to the game while enhancing the performance effect of the blackout performance at the time of winning.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, even if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment (step S25TM1060 YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the processes after step S25TM1090. That is, even if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of determining whether or not to execute the chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180). ), a process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220), and a process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1270). According to such a configuration, regardless of whether or not it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, the process of determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effects (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) is performed. By doing so, it is possible to achieve communalization and simplification of processing in production control.

As shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, in the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment, if it is determined to execute the winning blackout effect (YES in step S25TM1060 ), effect control CPU 120 sets a specific flag (step S25TM1080). When the specific flag is set (YES in step S25TM1135), the effect control CPU 120 skips the processes after step S25TM1140. That is, when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of determining whether or not to execute the chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180), The process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220) and the process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1270) are skipped.

According to such a configuration, by executing the blackout effect at the time of winning, the visibility of the display screen of the image display device 5 is lowered and the visibility becomes difficult, so that it is possible to give surprise to the player. can. In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the player pays attention to the degree of combination of the predetermined effects (chance eye effect, comment effect, change effect) as the pre-reading effect. You can improve your interest. In addition, when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, a process for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect (chance eye effect, comment notice effect, change effect) that should be restricted (execution/non-execution determination process, effect mode (determining process) itself is not performed, when the winning blackout effect is executed, the predetermined effect is limited, and the process in the effect control can be optimized.

As described above, among the winning flash effect, the chance effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect, the greater the number of effects executed in combination (the number of effects executed in combination), the higher the expectation of a big hit. ing. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 (2) to (5), when the flash effect at the time of winning is being executed, predetermined effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change effect) as other pre-reading preview effects ) can be executed. According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by drawing attention to the degree of combination of the predetermined effects (the number of effects executed in combination, patterns of combinations) when the winning flash effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), during the period in which the winning blackout effect is being executed, the blackout image (the first By displaying the blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the decorative patterns [third layer ] is in a state of being difficult to see. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 (2) to (5), even during the period when the winning flash effect is being executed, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, This is a state in which the decoration pattern [third layer] can be visually recognized.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, in the starting winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the timing at which the starting winning occurs is the symbol stop period or the symbol during the variable display being executed. If it is any timing of the fixed period (that is, if it is the timing of the specific period (see FIG. 9-8)) (YES in step S25TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning blackout effect. The process of determining the presence/absence (the process of steps S25TM1040 to S25TM1080) is skipped. Therefore, the execution of the winning blackout effects based on the starting winnings occurring within a specific period is restricted. Out effects are not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the timing at which the start winning occurs is the symbol stop period or the symbol stop period in the variable display being executed. At any timing of the symbol fixing period (that is, at any timing of the specific period (see FIG. 9-8)) (YES or NO in step S25TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. is determined (processing of steps S25TM1090 to S25TM1130). Therefore, the execution of the winning flash effect based on the starting winning that occurred within a specific period is not limited, and in this embodiment, the winning flash effect is targeted for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning that occurred within a specific period. It is possible to perform a production.

According to such a configuration, the execution of the winning-time blackout effect is restricted during the symbol stop period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the symbol confirmation stop period during which the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. The state in which the combination of decorative symbols suggesting (notifying) is visible continues, and it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the display result of the variable display. On the other hand, since the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is not restricted during the pattern stop period for stopping and displaying the decorative patterns and the pattern fixing stop period for fixing and stopping the decorative patterns, the opportunity for executing the special performance can be secured and the interest is improved. can.

As shown in FIG. 9-9(B), when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, there are two types of effect modes (white light emitting mode, red light emitting mode) for the flash effect at the time of winning. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the type of player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, there is one type of effect mode of the blackout effect at the time of winning, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is determined according to the effect mode. No different. According to such a configuration, by making the performance mode of the blackout performance at the time of winning a single one, the performance mode of the blackout performance at the time of winning is clarified to impress the player, and the blackout performance at the time of winning is expected to be a big hit. The degree can also be clarified.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display result is “loss (with time reduction)”, the execution ratio of the blackout effect at the time of winning is 0%, while the display result is “big hit”. In this case, the execution ratio of the winning blackout effect is 60%. Therefore, when the display result is "big hit", the execution ratio of the winning blackout effect is higher than when the display result is "loss (with time reduction)".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B), when the display result is "loss (with time reduction)", the execution ratio of the flash effect at the time of winning is 10% (white light emission mode: 10%, red light emission mode : 0%), on the other hand, when the display result is "big hit", the execution ratio of the winning flash effect is 70% (white light emission mode: 20%, red light emission mode: 50%). Therefore, when the display result is "big win", the execution ratio of the win-time flash effect is higher than when the display result is "loss (with time reduction)".

According to such a configuration, when the display result is "big hit", the execution ratio of the special effect is higher than when the display result is "loss (with time reduction)", and the special effect is executed. By doing so, the player can expect a big win.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above-described first embodiment, the blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), various effects images (decorative pattern [third layer], corresponding display [third layer], mini characters and comments An example is shown in which the visibility of the image [third layer] and the background image [fourth layer]) is reduced to make it difficult to see, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and effects using other effect devices are also possible. You may make it restrict|limit.

For example, in the comment notice effect, a mini-character and a comment image are displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5, and character voice sounds corresponding to the characters shown in the comment image are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is designed to be Here, in the above-described first embodiment, when the winning-time blackout effect is executed, and when the comment notice effect is executed, black is used as the cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying out images (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the mini character and comment image [third layer] of the image display device 5 can be visually recognized. The visibility is reduced to make it difficult to see. On the other hand, there are no restrictions on the playback output of character voice sounds, so it is possible to play back and output character voice sounds (“Next, chance?”, “Next, expect!”) in response to the execution of the comment notice effect. Although it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the mini character and the comment image [third layer], the player can recognize that the comment announcement effect has been executed by the character voice sound.

Not limited to such a form, when the comment notice effect is executed during the period in which the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the visibility of the mini character and the comment image [third layer] is reduced and visually recognized. In addition to the difficult state, reproduction output of character voice sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be restricted. For example, during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is being executed, the comment notice effect is executed in a manner that is difficult to see in the third layer, and the character voice sound corresponding to the comment notice effect is not reproduced and output. You may do so.

Also, compared to the case where the comment notice effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the case where the comment notice effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed is better. , the volume of the character voice sound may be lowered. That is, compared to the case where the comment notice effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the case where the comment notice effect is executed during the period when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed is better. , character voice sounds may be difficult to recognize.

(2) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the game effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and a predetermined effect image (for example, the light emission color of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed on the image display device 5). It may be possible to execute a predetermined light emission effect for displaying an effect image of a corresponding display color) on the third layer.

For example, in the above-described first embodiment, when the predetermined light emission effect is executed during the period in which the winning blackout effect is not executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer is visible and the game effect lamp is displayed. 9 emits light in a predetermined light emission mode, and when the predetermined light emission effect is executed during the period in which the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer becomes difficult to see, while the lamp for game effect. 9 may emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. It should be noted that, unlike this example, when the predetermined light emission effect is executed during the period in which the winning blackout effect is not executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer is visible and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. Light is emitted in a predetermined light emission mode, and when the predetermined light emission performance is performed during the period when the blackout performance at the time of winning is performed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer becomes difficult to see and the game effect lamp 9 lights up. Control or flashing control may not be performed (no light emission).

Further, in the above-described second embodiment, when the predetermined light emission effect is executed during the period in which the winning blackout effect is not executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer is visible and the game effect lamp is displayed. While 9 emits light in a predetermined light emission mode, during the period in which the blackout effect at the time of winning is being executed, it may not be determined that the predetermined light emission effect is to be executed based on the fact that the specific flag is set. good.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the winning flash effect ends when the ready-to-win state is established.

For example, during the variable display of decorative patterns, temporarily stopping the decorative patterns and then resuming the variable display enables pseudo-continuous effects in which one variable display is simulated as multiple variable displays. When such a configuration is adopted, in the variable display that is the target of advance notice of the flash effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning may be ended at the start timing of the pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by super reach, the flash performance at the time of winning may be ended at the timing when the super reach is developed in the variable display for which the flash performance at the time of winning is announced.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, there is one type of effect mode for the blackout effect at the time of winning. good too.

For example, as the winning blackout effect, a first special winning blackout effect and a second special winning blackout effect can be executed. In the winning blackout effect of the first special mode, blackout images (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second 2 layer]) is displayed. On the other hand, in the blackout effect at the time of winning of the second special mode, the transmittance is higher than that of the blackout image used in the blackout effect of the first special mode as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 ( For example, it is assumed that a special blackout image is displayed, the transmittance of which is such that the third and fourth layers are slightly visible. At this time, when the second special mode winning blackout performance is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher than when the first special winning blackout performance is executed. It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big win is not limited to such a form, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the first special mode winning blackout effect is executed than when the second special winning blackout effect is executed. You can make it higher.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the display result is a "minor hit", a special effect (a blackout effect at the time of winning, a flash effect at the time of winning) and a predetermined effect (chance effect, comment notice effect, change However, not limited to this form, when the display result is a "small hit", special effects (blackout effect at winning, flash effect at winning), The execution ratio of at least one of the predetermined effects (chance effect, comment advance notice effect, change effect) may be different from 0%. That is, when the display result is a "minor hit", at least one of the special effects (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning) and predetermined effects (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) is performed. It may be executable.

(6) In the second embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, any of the chance effect, the comment advance notice effect, and the change effect is executed. is not determined, but not limited to this form, even if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, the chance effect, the comment notice effect, and the change effect One type or two types of advance notice effects may be executable. That is, when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, it is possible to execute less types of advance notice effects than when it is decided not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning. good.

(7) In the above-described second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, any of the chance effect, the comment advance notice effect, and the change effect is executed. is not determined. Not limited to such a form, when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, it is possible to execute one or more types of notice effects among the chance effect, comment notice effect, and change effect. , the advance notice effect may be executed at a lower rate than when it is decided not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, when a start winning occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol fixing period (specific period), the winning blackout effect for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is not executed. I gave an example. Not limited to such a form, when a start winning occurs during a symbol stop period or a symbol fixed period (specific period), a blackout effect at the time of winning can be executed for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning. However, at a lower rate than when the starting winning occurs during a period different from the symbol stop period or the symbol fixing period (specific period), the blackout effect at the time of winning will be executed for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning. You may do so.

(9) In the above embodiment, when a start winning occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol fixing period (specific period), the winning blackout effect for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is restricted. However, not limited to this, even if it is not within the symbol stop period, the start winning occurs when the remaining period until the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds). In this case, the winning blackout effect for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning may be restricted. Also, for a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern with super reach), the remaining period until the fluctuation display based on the specific fluctuation pattern ends is within a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds) Start when When a prize is won, the blackout effect at the time of winning for the variable display corresponding to the starting prize may be limited.

(10) In the above embodiment, only when both the determination result at the time of starting winning regarding the reserved memory and the display result of the variable display during execution are "missing (no time reduction)" (YES in step S25TM1020), An example was shown in which the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance effect, and the comment notice effect can be executed. Even if any of the display results of the variable display does not result in "loss (no time saving)", one of the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance effect, and the comment notice effect It may be possible to execute more types of effects.

For example, even if any of the determination result at the time of start winning regarding reserved memory and the display result of the variable display during execution is "missing (with time reduction)", the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, and the chance At least one type of effect out of the eye effect and the comment notice effect may be made executable. In such a configuration, the symbol determination period (for example, 20 seconds) related to the variable display in which the display result is "loss (with time reduction)" is, as described above, a variation in which the display result is "loss (no time reduction)". It is different from the symbol fixing period (for example, 0.5 seconds) related to display. Here, when the start winning occurs during the symbol fixing period (for example, 20 seconds) related to the variable display where the display result is "loss (with time reduction)", in the same way as when it is determined YES in step S25TM1030, The blackout effect will not be executed at the time of winning.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed when the start winning occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol fixing period (specified period) in the variable display. Regardless of the form, even if the start winning occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol fixed period (specific period) in the variable display, some modes (part types) of the blackout effect at the time of winning can be executed. may be For example, even if the starting winning occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol fixing period (specific period) in the variable display, the variable display (holding memory) corresponding to the starting winning is determined as a big hit (or super reach). In such a case, there may be a case where a blackout effect at the time of winning is executed in a special manner accompanied by reproduction output of a special winning sound for informing that a big win is generated (or develops into super ready-to-win). In addition, if the start winning occurs during the symbol stop period or the symbol fixing period (specific period) in the variable display, the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed at a lower rate than when the starting winning occurs outside the specified period. You may do so.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the game ball wins the starting winning hole (for example, within 0.5 seconds after the game ball wins the starting winning hole), the blackout effect at the time of winning and the flash at the time of winning Although an example in which the effect is executed has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form. For example, any timing within the period from the timing of the start winning to the end of the variable display that is being executed at the timing of the start winning. Then, a blackout effect corresponding to the starting prize or a flash effect corresponding to the starting prize may be executed. In addition, during the period from the timing of the start winning prize to the end of the variable display executed at the timing of the start winning prize and the start of the next variable display (including the start of the next variable display) At the timing, a blackout effect corresponding to the starting prize or a flash effect corresponding to the starting prize may be executed.

As described above, the characteristic portion 25TM and each modification include the following (means A1-1), (means A1-2), (means A1-3), (means A2) to (means A11 ) is disclosed.

(Means A1-1) The start condition is satisfied (the game ball has won the start winning opening), and then the start condition is satisfied (not controlled by either the big win game state or the small win game state, A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) based on the fact that the number of retained memories is not 0) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) for the player. and
Judgment means (CPU 103 for executing a start prize judgment process (step S101)) for judging that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled based on the establishment of the starting condition;
A production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production based on the determination by the determination means,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
A special effect (a blackout effect at the time of winning a prize, a flash effect at the time of winning a prize) can be executed within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the starting condition,
Predetermined effects (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) can be executed at different timings from the special effects (blackout effect when winning a prize, flash effect when winning a prize),
There are a plurality of types of special effects, and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect at the time of winning is higher than the flash effect at the time of winning),
When a special effect of a specific type is executed, the display mode on the display means becomes a specific mode (when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the visibility of the effect image on the image display device 5 decreases and becomes difficult to see. ),
The effect executing means can execute a combination of a predetermined type of special effect and a predetermined effect (as shown in FIG. can be executed in combination with at least one of the productions),
When a special effect of a specific type is executed, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined effect (as shown in FIG. By displaying a blackout image [2nd layer] as a covering image covering the entire area, chance eye production (decorative pattern [3rd layer]), comment notice production (mini character and comment image [3rd layer]) , and the visibility of the effect image related to the change effect (suspended display [third layer]) is reduced and becomes difficult to see),
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the degree of combination of the effects executed by the effect execution means (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning, chance eye effect, comment notice effect, and change effect are combined). The degree of expectation for a big hit varies depending on the number and production mode),
Execution of a predetermined effect can be determined in both cases of execution of a specific type of special effect and cases of not executing a specific type of special effect (see FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7). Thus, regardless of whether or not it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment (YES or NO at step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 Processing for determining whether or not to execute a chance effect (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180), processing for determining whether or not to execute a comment notice effect (step S25TM1185 to step S25TM1220), processing for determining whether or not to execute a change effect (step S25TM1230 to step S25TM1270))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player by changing the display mode on the display means to the specific mode, and to make the player interested in the degree of complexity of the effect to be executed. On the other hand, since it is possible to decide whether or not to execute a specific type of special effect, it is possible to standardize processing in effect control.

(Means A1-2) The start condition is satisfied (the game ball has won the start winning opening), and then the start condition is satisfied (not controlled by either the big win game state or the small win game state, A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) based on the fact that the number of retained memories is not 0) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) for the player. and
Judgment means (CPU 103 for executing a start prize judgment process (step S101)) for judging that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled based on the establishment of the starting condition;
A production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production based on the determination by the determination means,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
A special effect (a blackout effect at the time of winning a prize, a flash effect at the time of winning a prize) can be executed within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the starting condition,
Predetermined effects (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) can be executed at different timings from the special effects (blackout effect when winning a prize, flash effect when winning a prize),
There are a plurality of types of special effects, and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect at the time of winning is higher than the flash effect at the time of winning),
When a special effect of a specific type is executed, the display mode on the display means becomes a specific mode (when the blackout effect at the time of winning is executed, the visibility of the effect image on the image display device 5 decreases and becomes difficult to see. ),
The effect executing means can execute a combination of a predetermined type of special effect and a predetermined effect (as shown in FIG. can be executed in combination with at least one of the productions),
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the predetermined effect is limited (as shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, in the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment, the is determined to be executed (YES in step S25TM1060), the process of determining whether or not to execute the chance effect (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180), the process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1185). ~ step S25TM1220), the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted by skipping the process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230~step S25TM1270),
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the degree of combination of the effects executed by the effect execution means (blackout effect at the time of winning, flash effect at the time of winning, chance eye effect, comment notice effect, and change effect are combined). Expectations for big hits vary depending on the number and production mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player by changing the display mode on the display means to the specific mode, and to make the player interested in the degree of complexity of the effect to be executed. On the other hand, when a specific type of special effect is executed, the predetermined effect is restricted, so it is possible to optimize the processing in the effect control.

(Means A1-3) Establishment of the starting condition (that the game ball has entered the starting winning hole), and establishment of the starting condition thereafter (not controlled by either the big win game state or the small win game state, Also, the number of reserved memories is not 0), the variable display of special identification information (variable display of special symbols) is executed, and the game can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. A machine (pachinko machine 1),
Determining means (starting winning determination process (step S101) for determining that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening) is executed CPU 103) to
Production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production based on the determination by the determination means,
In response to the variable display of the special identification information, the variable display of the decoration identification information (the variable display of the decorative pattern) is executed, and the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is displayed for a specific period (the pattern stop period and the pattern fixed period). ) and decoration variable display means (production control CPU 120) that can be displayed over
with
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special effect (blackout effect at winning, flash effect at winning) within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from establishment of the start condition,
There are a plurality of types of special effects, and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect at the time of winning is higher than the flash effect at the time of winning),
When a special effect of a specific type is executed, the decoration identification information becomes invisible (as shown in FIGS. By displaying the blackout image [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative patterns [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. becomes difficult to see),
When a special effect of a predetermined type different from the specific type is executed, the decoration identification information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIGS. is executed, the blackout image [second layer] is not displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 The visibility of the [3rd layer] does not decrease and becomes visible),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a predetermined type of special effect while limiting execution of a specific type of special effect when the start condition is satisfied in the specific period (FIGS. 9-6 and 9). As shown in -7, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, in the variable display corresponding to the start winning effect occurring in the specific period, the execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning is restricted, while the specified Even in the variable display corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period, it is possible to execute the flash effect at the time of winning)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by not lowering the visibility of the decoration identification information during the specific period, misunderstanding of the display result can be prevented, and at the same time, an opportunity to execute the special effect can be ensured.

Also, the gaming machine of means A1-3 may comprise a part of the configuration of either the gaming machine of means A1-1 or means A1-2.

(Means A2) Any game machine of means A1-1 to means A1-3,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
In the variable display (variable display) subject to a specific type of special effect (blackout effect when winning), a specific type of special effect is executed in response to the execution of a related effect (connection zone effect) related to the specific type of special effect. can be terminated (as shown in FIG. 9-15 (6), the winning blackout effect is terminated at the timing when the connection zone effect is started),
In the variable display (variable display) targeted for the predetermined kind of special performance (flash performance at the time of winning), the predetermined kind of special performance is terminated in response to the execution of the predetermined performance suggesting the control to the advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 9-15 (8), the win-time flash effect is terminated at the timing when the ready-to-win effect is started)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered when the special performance of the specific type ends, and to prevent the interest from being lowered when the special performance of the predetermined type ends. .

(Means A3) A game machine according to any of means A1-1 to means A1-3 and means A2,
When a special effect of a specific type is executed, the visibility of the effect background image on the display means decreases (as shown in FIGS. Then, the blackout image [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern is visually recognized. becomes difficult to see)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player when the special effect of the specific type is executed.

(Means A4) Any game machine of means A1-1 to means A1-3, means A2, or means A3,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the first decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) and the variable display of the second decoration identification information (variable display of small patterns) are displayed by the display means (image display device 5). ), and
As the pending information corresponding to the number of variable displays that have not been executed, the first pending information (holding display) and the second pending information (the value of the first reserved memory number and the value of the second reserved memory number) are displayed. can be displayed on the means (image display device 5),
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the visibility of the first decoration identification information and the visibility of the first reserved memory information are lowered, and the visibility of the second decoration identification information and the visibility of the second reserved memory information. does not decrease (as shown in FIG. 9-15, when the winning blackout effect is executed, the blackout image [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. As a result, the visibility of the decorative pattern [3rd layer] and the reserved display [3rd layer] is reduced and becomes difficult to see, and the small pattern [1st layer], the value of the first reserved memory number [1st layer], and the value of the second reserved storage number [first layer] is not reduced and becomes visible)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the visibility of the information related to the game while increasing the performance effect of the specific type of special performance.

(Means A5) Any game machine of means A1-1 to means A1-3 and means A2 to means A4,
The determination means (CPU 103) can determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state based on establishment of a start condition regarding variable display,
The determination means (start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment)
Determining whether or not to execute a predetermined notice effect (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) based on the determination by the determination means (result of determination at the time of start winning),
It is possible to decide whether or not to execute the predetermined advance notice effect in both cases of execution of a specific type of special effect and cases of not executing a specific type of special effect (see FIGS. 9-6 and As shown in 9-7, even if it is decided to execute the winning blackout effect (YES in step S25TM1060), the process of determining whether or not to execute the chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180). ), a process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220), and a process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1270).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the predetermined advance notice effect regardless of whether or not the specific type of special effect is executed, so that the processing in the effect control is made common and simplified. can be achieved.

(Means A6) Any game machine of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A5,
The determination means (CPU 103) can determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state based on establishment of a start condition regarding variable display,
The determination means (start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment)
Determining whether or not to execute a predetermined notice effect (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) based on the determination by the determination means (result of determination at the time of start winning),
When a specific kind of special effect is executed, it is not decided whether or not to execute the predetermined notice effect (as shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, the blackout effect at winning If it is determined (YES in step S25TM1060), the process of determining whether or not to execute the chance effect (step S25TM1140 to step S25TM1180), the process of determining whether or not to execute the comment notice effect (step S25TM1185 to step S25TM1220). ), the process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230 to step S25TM1270) is skipped)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the processing in the effect control by not determining whether or not to execute the predetermined advance notice effect when the specific type of special effect is executed.

(Means A7) Any game machine of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A6,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is an production based on the determination by the determination means (judgment result at the time of start winning), and is a predetermined production different from a specific type of special production (chance eye production, comment notice production, change effect) and a predetermined type of advance notice effect (flash effect at the time of winning) can be executed in combination,
Depending on the number of predetermined effects executed in combination with predetermined types of advance notice effects, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs (flash effect at winning, chance eye effect, comment notice effect, and change effect). The higher the number of complex effects, the higher the expectation of a big hit.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by making the player pay attention to the number of predetermined effects executed in combination with the predetermined types of advance notice effects.

(Means A8) Any game machine of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A7,
Depending on the type of special effect executed by the effect execution means, the number of effect devices used for the special effect differs (the prize-winning accessory effect as the special effect includes two effect devices (image display device 5 and movable body 25TM500 ), while the flash effect at the time of winning as a special effect is executed using only one effect device (luminous body 25TM100))
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference between the types of special effects, and to give different impressions to the player depending on the types of special effects.

(Means A9) Any game machine of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A8,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
Perform variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
When a predetermined type of special effect is executed, the decoration identification information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the winning flash effect is executed, the decorative pattern [third layer] possible state),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a predetermined type of special effect while limiting the execution of a specific type of special effect during the suspension period of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7). , In the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, with respect to the variable display corresponding to the starting win occurring during the specific period, the execution of the winning blackout effect is restricted, while the starting win effect occurring during the specific period is restricted. Regarding the variable display corresponding to the winning, it is possible to execute a flash effect at the time of winning)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by not lowering the visibility of the decoration identification information during the suspension period of the decoration identification information, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of the display result and secure an opportunity to execute the special effect.

(Means A10) Any gaming machine of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A9,
There is only one specific type of special effect mode (there is one type of effect mode for the blackout effect at the time of winning),
There are a plurality of predetermined types of special effect modes, and depending on the predetermined type of special effect mode, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is different (There are two types of effect modes of the winning flash effect, a white light emitting mode and a red light emitting mode. , and the expectation of a big hit is higher in the red light emission mode than in the white light emission mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the aspect of the special effect of the specific type, and it is possible to clarify the difference from the special effect of the predetermined type, thereby diversifying the special effect.

(Means A11) Any game machine of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A10,
The display result of the variable display (variable display) is the first display result (“loss (with time reduction)”) that is controlled to the time reduction state without being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). In the case of the second display result (“big hit”) controlled to the advantageous state, the execution ratio of the special effect is higher (as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), the display result is “big hit”). The execution ratio of the blackout effect at the time of winning is higher than when the display result is “missing (with time reduction)”)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the display result will be the second display result by executing the special effect.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of special identification information on the basis of establishment of a start condition and subsequent establishment of the start condition, and controllable to an advantageous state for a player,
determining means for determining that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state based on the establishment of the starting condition;
Production execution means capable of executing production based on the determination by the determination means;
decoration variable display means for executing variable display of the decoration identification information in response to execution of the variable display of the special identification information, and displaying the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information for a specific period;
with
The effect executing means is capable of executing a special effect within a predetermined period from the establishment of the starting condition,
There are multiple types of special effects, and depending on the type of special effects, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is different,
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the decoration identification information becomes difficult to see,
The decoration identification information is visible when a predetermined type of special effect different from the specific type is executed,
The production executing means is
When the start condition is satisfied outside the specific period, a specific type of special effect and a predetermined type of special effect can be executed in parallel,
A gaming machine, wherein when the start condition is satisfied in the specific period, execution of a specific type of special effect is restricted while a predetermined type of special effect can be executed.

Images